om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Student Guide
January 2006
MT10050 NX 4
Publication Number
mt10050_g NX 4
Manual History
Unigraphics
Version
Publication
Date
Version 15.0
February 1999
Version 16.0
January 2000
Version 17.0
December 2000
Version 18.0
September 2001
Unigraphics NX
September 2002
Unigraphics NX 2
NX 3
NX 4
September 2003
November 2004
January 2006
ce.
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
Manual
Revision
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
om
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
an rs
Intended Audience . . . .
Course Objectives . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . .
How to Use This Course
Class Standards . . . . . .
Part File Naming . .
Seed Parts . . . . . . . .
Colors . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions of Terms . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
11
11
12
14
14
15
15
16
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Starting NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cue/Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows File Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Creating a New Part . . . . .
Opening Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Opening an Existing Part .
Activity Save Part As (Copying a Part)
Activity Closing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1-2
. 1-3
. 1-4
. 1-5
. 1-7
. 1-9
1-10
1-12
1-14
1-16
1-17
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2-2
. 2-3
. 2-6
. 2-7
2-11
2-14
2-15
2-17
2-19
2-21
2-23
2-25
Practical Applications of NX
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 3-2
. 3-4
. 3-5
. 3-6
. 3-8
. 3-9
3-10
3-18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Creating a Block . .
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Vectors . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Creating a Cylinder
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4-2
. 4-3
. 4-5
. 4-7
. 4-8
. 4-9
4-11
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 5-2
. 5-5
. 5-7
. 5-8
. 5-9
5-12
5-21
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-28
5-29
5-34
5-35
5-37
5-38
5-41
5-42
5-43
5-48
5-50
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Creating and Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 7-2
. 7-3
. 7-5
. 7-8
7-10
7-12
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
om
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
an rs
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Creating Edge Blends
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Creating Chamfers . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 8-2
. 8-3
. 8-6
8-10
8-13
8-16
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 9-2
. 9-3
. 9-6
. 9-7
. 9-8
. 9-9
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 10-2
. 10-4
. 10-5
. 10-6
. 10-7
. 10-8
10-10
10-11
10-13
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-21
Practical Applications of NX
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 11-2
. 11-4
. 11-5
. 11-6
. 11-7
11-10
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-17
11-18
11-20
11-21
11-22
11-27
11-30
11-34
11-47
T
r
w i
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 12-2
. 12-3
. 12-4
. 12-6
12-16
12-21
12-23
12-28
12-33
12-37
12-38
12-43
12-44
12-51
12-52
Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Sketching Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 13-6
. 13-7
. 13-8
13-12
13-13
13-14
13-21
13-28
13-33
13-34
13-37
13-42
13-46
13-48
13-54
13-57
13-59
13-63
13-66
13-69
13-71
13-76
13-85
13-92
13-93
13-99
T
r
w i
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 14-2
. 14-3
. 14-7
. 14-9
14-13
14-14
14-16
14-17
14-22
14-25
14-27
14-29
14-33
14-36
14-38
14-42
14-45
14-48
Practical Applications of NX
Contents
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 15-2
. 15-3
. 15-7
. 15-8
15-11
15-15
15-18
15-21
15-22
15-23
15-27
15-32
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Instance Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity (Optional) Associativity of the Rotation Axis
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 16-2
. 16-3
. 16-4
. 16-5
. 16-8
16-12
16-15
.nu
T
r
w i
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 17-2
. 17-4
. 17-5
. 17-9
17-10
Practical Applications of NX
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 18-2
. 18-3
. 18-4
. 18-5
. 18-7
. 18-8
18-12
18-15
18-17
18-18
18-19
18-20
18-21
18-22
mt10050_g NX 4
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
om
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18-24
18-26
18-27
18-28
18-33
18-36
18-37
18-40
18-41
18-45
18-47
18-48
18-50
18-52
18-53
18-54
18-56
18-61
18-62
18-65
18-67
18-71
18-72
18-75
18-76
T
r
w i
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-6
A-8
A-10
A-12
A-14
A-16
A-18
A-19
A-21
A-23
A-25
A-27
A-28
A-30
A-32
A-34
Practical Applications of NX
Contents
Project 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Project 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Project 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Expression Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precedence and Associativity
Legacy Unit Conversion . . .
Built-in Functions . . . . . . . .
...
...
..
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
om
.
.
.
.
e
an rs
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methods to Specify a Point . . .
WCS and Absolute Coordinates
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. C-1
. C-2
C-11
C-12
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Defaults Levels . . . . . . . .
Setting Customer Defaults . . . . . . .
USER, GROUP, and SITE directories
Managing Your Changes . . . . . . . . .
Updating to a New Release of NX . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D-1
D-2
D-3
D-6
D-8
D-9
D-10
T
r
w i
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Overview
Intended Audience
Course Objectives
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
After successfully completing this course, the student should be able to:
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
Prerequisites
Practical Applications of NX
11
i
o
c n
Step 1:
(FileOpen)
om
12
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
mt10050_g NX 4
Overview
Mouse Buttons
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The mouse will be used throughout this course to make selections. Examples
of different mouse devices are shown. The mouse buttons are referred to as
the first, second, and third mouse buttons, starting from left to right. On
mouses with mouse wheels, the wheel acts as mouse button 2 when it is
pressed. On two-button mouses, the buttons represent 1 and 3. Both buttons
pushed together equals mouse button 2.
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
13
Class Standards
Class Standards
The following standards will be used in this course. Standardization allows
you to work with and predict the organization of parts created by others. All
work should be performed in accordance with these standards.
ce.
Part Number
Configuration
Revision
Extension
om
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
1
2
3
4
i
o
c n
14
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
mt10050_g NX 4
Overview
Seed Parts
Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any
settings that are part-dependent (saved with the part). This may include
non-geometric data such as:
Preferences
Layer categories
Part attributes
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
ce.
Colors
a
ww l
V
Two seed parts are available for use in this course, seedpart_in for inch parts
and seedpart_mm for metric parts. These parts incorporate the standards
described above.
.nu
T
r
w i
Object
Solid Bodies
Sheet Bodies
Lines and Arc
(non-sketch curves)
Conics and Splines
(non-sketch curves)
Sketch Curves
Reference Curves
(in sketches)
Datum Features
Points and Coordinate Systems
System Display Color
Default Color
Light Gray (87)
Light Dull Azure (92)
Dark Hard Blue (212)
Dark Hard Blue (212)
Obscure Dull Green (144)
Dark Faded Cyan (105)
Light Weak Red (81)
Dark Hard Blue (212)
Orange Orange Red (114)
NX identifies colors using numbers with IDs that range from 1 to 216.
Practical Applications of NX
15
Definitions of Terms
Definitions of Terms
Explicit Modeling
Explicit modeling is modeling that is not parametric. Objects are created
relative to model space, not each other. Changes to one or more objects do not
necessarily affect other objects or the finished model. Examples of explicit
modeling include creating a line between two existing points or creating an
arc through three existing points. If one of the existing points were moved,
the line/arc would not change.
i
o
c n
Parametric Modeling
Constraint-based Modeling
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
Hybrid modeling refers to the selectively combined use of the three types
of modeling described above. Hybrid modelers allow designers to use
parametric modeling where needed without requiring that the entire model be
constrained before proceeding. Because of this, designers have more flexibility
in modeling techniques. The NXhybrid modeler supports traditional explicit
geometric modeling along with constraint-based sketching and parametric
feature modeling. All tools are integrated so they can be used in combination.
16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
Getting Started
Purpose
Objectives
i
o
c n
Start an NX session.
Open a Part.
Copy a Part.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
1-1
Getting Started
Starting NX
The first step in working in NX is to log on to a workstation and start an NX
session. Because this procedure may vary among companies and platforms,
consult your system administrator for a site specific procedure to follow.
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
After starting NX, you will see the "No Part" interface. This interface only
allows you to perform actions such as changing defaults and preferences,
opening an existing part, or creating a new part.
T
r
w i
The graphics shown in this text are taken from a workstation with a
Windows operating system. The display of windows and dialogs on a
UNIX workstation will differ slightly from those shown.
1-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Getting Started
Gateway Application
NX functions are divided into "applications". Gateway is the prerequisite
for all other interactive applications, and is the first application you enter
when you start NX and open or create a part. Gateway allows the review of
existing parts. To create or edit objects within a part, another application,
such as Modeling, must be started.
3 Status line
4 Resource bar
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
1-3
Getting Started
Cue/Status Line
The Cue/Status line appears at the top of the main application window. The
Cue line prompts you for user interaction. The Status line gives you feedback
about system activity.
To relocate the Cue and Status line below the graphics window,
choose ToolsCustomize, choose the Layout tab, and change the
Cue/Status Position to Bottom.
Menu Bar Pull-Down Menus
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Menu Bar is a horizontal arrangement of options displayed near the top
of the main NX window. These options correspond to different NX functional
categories. Clicking the first mouse button (MB1) over a Menu Bar option
displays a pull-down menu. Arrows to the right of items in a pull-down menu
indicate that further cascading menus are available.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
By default, menus appear folded so that only the frequently used options
are shown. The down arrow at the bottom of the menu can be selected to
display the full menu.
T
r
w i
1-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Getting Started
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Look in: option menu shows the name of the current selected drive or
folder.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Choosing the arrow on the right side of the box (or anywhere within the box)
will list a hierarchy of the available folders and drives. Choosing anywhere
away from the list of the available folders and drives will dismiss the listing
without selecting another folder or drive.
The list in the window below the Look In: box shows the available folders and
files. NX parts have a .prt extension.
The Up One Level option works with the Look in: option menu to
traverse back up through the folder hierarchy.
Practical Applications of NX
1-5
Getting Started
1
The Create New Folder option allows new sub-folders to be created in
the current folder.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The View Menu option menu allows the appearance of the listing in the
window to be modified. The default is a List. Selecting the Details button will
display a more detailed listing of the files and folders including Name, Size,
Type, last Modified date and time, and any Attributes that may apply to the
file. Other options include Thumbnails, Tiles, and Icons.
1-6
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
The
option at the top right of the dialog changes the cursor to
and
allows selection of any of the controls in the dialog for a short description
of their function.
mt10050_g NX 4
Getting Started
(FileNew)
Step 2:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
1-7
Getting Started
Step 3:
i
o
c n
Choose OK.
om
e
an rs
Ensure the folder is set to your home folder. This will also be
a standard practice for this class. Parts that you create should
be saved in a folder to which you have permissions.
ce.
a
ww l
V
As the creator of a part, you will have read and write access. This
means that you can modify the file and save the changes.
Save the part.
.nu
Step 4:
T
r
w i
1-8
Practical Applications of NX
(FileSave)
mt10050_g NX 4
Getting Started
i
o
c n
In most cases the displayed part and the work part are the same. There are
times when working in an assembly when it is advantageous that the work
part be other than the displayed part.
om
e
an rs
Since multiple parts may be open at any given time, you will need to control
which part is displayed in the graphics window. This can be accomplished
with the Window menu bar option.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
1-9
Getting Started
(FileOpen)
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Getting Started
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK to open the part
(or double-click on the file name).
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
1-11
Getting Started
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
In the Save Part File As dialog, use the Save in: option menu
to navigate to the proper folder to save the part. (HINT: This
should be one level up from the parts folder.)
Click in the File name field.
Key in ***_intro_1 as the new part name where *** represents
your initials.
1-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Getting Started
Choose OK.
The Status Line states that the part is being saved. When the
save is complete, the message Part file saved displays. Work
in NX may be resumed.
You can save your work and
exit NX all at once by choosing
FileCloseSave All and Exit. However,
do not close or exit at this time.
Leave the part open. It will be used in the next activity.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 2:
Practical Applications of NX
1-13
Getting Started
1-14
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Close Part dialog appears showing a list of all open parts in
the session.
T
r
w i
mt10050_g NX 4
Getting Started
i
o
c n
Because the part was not changed since it was last saved, it is
immediately closed. If the part had been changed, a warning
message would have appeared to let you know that the part has
been modified.
om
ce.
Step 2:
e
an rs
Closing the part does not save the part, it only clears the part from
the local memory. Changes that have been made to the part will
be lost if you continue.
a
ww l
V
.nu
Step 3:
T
r
w i
If there are any open parts in the session that have been modified
and have not been saved, a warning message displays.
Practical Applications of NX
1-15
Getting Started
Exiting NX
You can end an NXsession, by choosing FileExit.
i
o
c n
If any parts are still open and have been modified without saving, a warning
message displays.
1-16
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
T
r
w i
mt10050_g NX 4
Getting Started
Summary
In this lesson you:
Started an NX session.
Copied a Part.
Closed a Part.
Exited NX.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
1-17
ce.
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Lesson
Purpose
Objectives
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
2-1
Toolbars
The NX user interface supports the use of toolbars to allow quick access to
functionality via logical groupings of common functionality displayed as icons.
Each application has a set of toolbars which support functions within that
application (e.g. Modeling, Drafting, Assemblies, etc.).
When you exit an NX session, the state of the toolbars can be saved
so that they will displayed the same when you start a new session.
This is controlled by the Save layout at exit option under the General
tab in the PreferencesUser Interface dialog.
i
o
c n
Undocked toolbars (2) are free floating on the screen. These toolbars are
shown within the NX window, but may be located outside the window
depending on screen setup.
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
2-2
om
e
an rs
mt10050_g NX 4
Customizing Toolbars
The display of the toolbars as well as the display of each element within a
toolbar may be customized.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Text Below Icon option can be used to display the names of
the icons in a toolbar.
Practical Applications of NX
2-3
2-4
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Use the Third Mouse Button (MB3) within the NX window but outside
the graphics window, to display a menu of all toolbars. The toolbars listed
with a check box are displayed. Choosing a toolbar name with the First
Mouse Button (MB1) will turn it on or off. The Customize option may be
selected to access the Customize dialog.
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
To turn on and off the display of icons within a toolbar, select the Toolbar
Options area of the toolbar and choose Add or Remove Buttons, and the
toolbar name. This will display a cascading menu with all of the available
icons for the toolbar. Placing a check in the box next to the command will
immediately display the icon in the appropriate toolbar. Removing the check
will hide the icon.
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
2-5
Roles
NX has many advanced capabilities, but while learning you may want to
use a smaller set of tools. Roles let you control the appearance of the user
interface in a number of ways. Some examples are:
i
o
c n
Choosing a Role
om
e
an rs
NX comes with a number of built-in roles. There are System Defaults roles:
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
There are also roles that are tailored to particular industry types and
experience levels, under the Industry Specific option:
To activate a role:
2-6
Click the role you want or drag it into the graphics window.
In the warning dialog, choose OK to accept the new role or choose Cancel
to stop the change from occurring.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
e
an rs
Step 2:
om
Select intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK to open the part
(or double-click on the file name).
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Click MB3 in the toolbar area (1) and choose Customize (2).
Practical Applications of NX
2-7
The Customize dialog helps you identify and control which toolbars
are displayed.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 3:
Undock a toolbar.
Place the cursor on the handle portion (1) of the Analysis
toolbar and press and hold down MB1.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Release MB1.
The name of the toolbar is displayed in its title bar while it is
undocked.
Step 4:
Dock a toolbar.
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
Drag the toolbar such that the header portion falls within the
main menu bar as shown.
Release MB1.
The toolbar is docked to the NX window.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
2-9
Step 5:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Release MB1.
i
o
c n
Step 6:
2-10
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Choose the Roles tab in the resource bar on the right side of the
graphics window.
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
This will display smaller icons so that all of the roles can be
seen at once.
Practical Applications of NX
2-11
i
o
c n
Step 3:
Choose StartModeling.
om
ce.
Step 4:
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 5:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The new role will appear in a User folder in the Roles palette.
Step 6:
Practical Applications of NX
2-13
Mouse Navigation
om
i
o
c n
The mouse may be used as well as the keyboard to make selections. A mouse
wheel acts as MB2 when it is pressed. On two button mouses, the buttons
represent MB1 and MB3. Both buttons pressed together act as MB2.
a
ww l
V
Action
ce.
Mouse Button
e
an rs
Below is a summary of the various actions that can be performed using the
mouse buttons.
.nu
T
r
w i
Second Mouse Button OK while in an operator. Press and hold down while
(center or both buttons) in the graphics window to Rotate the view. Hold
MB2
down Shift+MB2 to Pan and hold down Ctrl+MB2
to Zoom In/Out.
Third Mouse Button
(in graphic window)
MB3
2-14
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The mouse may be used to perform various actions depending upon placement
and position in the steps of the process. When the cursor is in the graphics
window and MB3 is pressed and released, the View Pop-Up menu is displayed.
This pop-up menu provides a shortcut to functions that are frequently used in
NX to manipulate the viewing of objects in the graphics window.
Practical Applications of NX
2-15
Option
Refresh
Fit
Fits the entire part to the view. Utilizes the fit percentage
found on the PreferencesVisualizationScreen dialog.
Zoom
Rotate
Activates the Rotate mode to rotate the view with the cursor.
Pan
Orient View
i
o
c n
Rendering
Style
Clear Rotate
Point
Undo
ce.
a
ww l
V
om
Set Rotate
Point
e
an rs
Description
.nu
T
r
w i
When you press and hold MB3, a radial pop-up displays icons that surround
the cursor location. These icons include display options that you can choose
just as you would from a menu. As you learn the position of the icons, just
moving the mouse in the appropriate direction will choose the option.
1 Shaded
2 Shaded with Edges
3 Studio
4 Fit
5 Wireframe with Dim Edges
6 Face Analysis
The View toolbar may also be used to perform many of the view
manipulation functions found in the View Pop-Up Menu.
2-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
If the cursor is near the boundary of the graphics window, rotation about a
horizontal, vertical, or normal axis is inferred and the cursor is displayed in
a single axis rotation mode. If the cursor is in the middle of the graphics
window, the axis of rotation is determined by the direction in which you
drag the cursor.
Practical Applications of NX
2-17
i
o
c n
2-18
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
F8 Key Orients the present view to a selected planar face or datum plane
or the planar view (top, front, right, back, bottom, left) that is closest to the
current view orientation.
mt10050_g NX 4
Selecting Objects
The Selection toolbar may be used to assist in the selection of an object for
creation, modification, or information. In NX, you may either select an object
first and then choose a function to perform, or, choose a function first and
then select the required object.
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Selection Type Filter is used to control precisely which type of object can
be selected. When a type is chosen from this list, no other object types can
be selected. The contents of the list depends on whether you have already
chosen an NX function and which function you are performing.
a
ww l
V
There are many additional options which can be added as icons to the
Selection toolbar to further discriminate in the selection of objects. Some of
these options are also available by choosing EditSelection from the menu
bar.
.nu
T
r
w i
MB3 may be used to choose an available operator for an object. The cursor
must be on top of the object and the object highlighted for the MB3 pop-up
menu to appear.
The items on the pop-up menu will vary depending on the type of object. The
following pop-up menu is typically displayed for a feature.
Practical Applications of NX
2-19
If you press and hold MB3 over an object, a radial pop-up appears. The
options will vary depending on the type of object. The following radial pop-up
menu is typically displayed for a feature.
i
o
c n
Deselecting Objects
om
If you select the wrong object, you can deselect it by holding down the <Shift>
key and selecting it again with MB1.
2-20
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
To deselect all objects in the graphics window, press the <Esc> key.
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
The state of the Preview Selection setting is not saved with the part
but remains in effect for the NX session.
Using QuickPick for Multiple Selection Candidates
om
e
an rs
When selecting objects in the graphics window, more than one object will
often be within the selection ball. QuickPick is a selection confirmation
interface that provides a way to browse through multiple candidates to select
a specific object.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
Moving the selection ball over an object will highlight it for preview. If there
is more than one selectable object at the selection ball location and the cursor
lingers for a short period of time, the cursor changes to a QuickPick indicator:
T
r
w i
This cursor display indicates that there is more than one selectable object at
that position. Using MB1 after the cursor changes will display the QuickPick
dialog.
Practical Applications of NX
2-21
All selectable objects beneath the cursor are listed in the dialog. Use MB2
to cycle through the items in the list and then choose MB1 when the desired
object is highlighted. The icons in the dialog may be used to narrow down list
to include only construction objects, features, body objects (faces, edges, etc.),
components, or annotations.
2-22
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
icon.
.nu
Click and hold MB3 and choose the Wireframe with Dim Edges
from the radial pop-up.
In the graphics window, but not on top of the part, click MB3.
Choose Orient ViewRight in the pop-up menu.
Press the Home key on the keyboard.
The view is oriented to the Trimetric view.
Practical Applications of NX
2-23
Place and hold the cursor at the location shown below until the
QuickPick indicator appears.
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
2-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Summary
In this lesson you:
Modified the location and contents of toolbars.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
2-25
ce.
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Lesson
Coordinate Systems
3
Purpose
i
o
c n
This lesson is an introduction to the coordinate systems that are used in NX.
Objectives
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
3-1
Coordinate Systems
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
There are several types of coordinate systems that are utilized in NX. This
lesson will discuss the following types:
3-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Coordinate Systems
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Since the ABS is not mobile, the Work Coordinate System (WCS) is used to
facilitate geometry construction in different orientations. The WCS can be
located and oriented manually anywhere in model space. The WCS is not a
selectable entity.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
The location and/or orientation of the WCS will need to be considered when
using the following functions:
Practical Applications of NX
3-3
Coordinate Systems
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
3-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Coordinate Systems
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
a
ww l
V
When the cursor passes over the WCS, it will highlight with
temporary rotation planes to indicate that it can be selected. If
there is other geometry in the vicinity and the WCS cannot be easily
selected, use the Utility toolbar or menu bar to access it.
.nu
After you move the WCS, you can either choose MB2 or turn off the Move
WCS icon to confirm the location and the WCS will return to a normal display.
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
3-5
Coordinate Systems
Origin Handle
When you select the cube-shaped handle at the origin of the WCS, you can
relocate the WCS to any point in the graphics window as dictated by the Snap
Point toolbar (End Point, Arc Center, etc.). Help indicators will display on a
highlighted object to help you predict where the WCS will be relocated.
om
ce.
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
The Snap Point toolbar becomes active when you need to specify a location.
It is available when the WCS origin handle is selected to help specify the
origin for the WCS.
Cursor Location is always available regardless of the other options that are
enabled in the toolbar.
3-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Coordinate Systems
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
3-7
Coordinate Systems
Axis Handles
When you select a conehead axis handle, a dynamic input field appears in
the graphics window next to the WCS to input a specific distance or snap
increment. You can also drag the handle to move the coordinate system along
the axis.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
a
ww l
V
3-8
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
The Snap value is the incremental distance the WCS will move as you drag
the axis handle. The default Snap value is 0 (zero) but you may enter a
different value. The Distance value will update as you drag the handle.
mt10050_g NX 4
Coordinate Systems
Rotation Handles
When you select a spherical rotation handle, a dynamic input field appears
next to the WCS to enter a specific angle or snap increment. You can also
drag the handle to rotate the coordinate system about the axis.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
The Snap value is an incremental angle to rotate the WCS. The default
Snap value is 45 so the WCS snaps in 45 degree increments as you drag the
rotation handle. The Angle value will update as you drag the handle.
Practical Applications of NX
3-9
Coordinate Systems
T
r
w i
3-10
om
.nu
Step 2:
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Coordinate Systems
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
Step 3:
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
(FormatWCSDynamics)
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
3-11
Coordinate Systems
Choose MB2.
e
an rs
Choose InformationPoint.
om
Step 4:
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Select the arc center shown by placing the cursor over the
circular edge. When the center highlighted, select the edge.
The coordinates of the arc center relative to both the WCS and
Absolute Coordinate System are displayed in an Information
window.
Information Units Millimeters
Point
XC =
0.000000000
X =
YC = 25.000000000
Y =
ZC = -14.000000000
Z =
32.500000000
14.000000000
16.000000000
3-12
Practical Applications of NX
(FormatWCSDynamics)
mt10050_g NX 4
Coordinate Systems
om
e
an rs
Choose MB2.
ce.
Step 6:
i
o
c n
.nu
a
ww l
V
The image below has been rotated for clarity. You may shade or
rotate the view for better viewing of the part.
T
r
w i
(FormatWCSDynamics)
Practical Applications of NX
3-13
Coordinate Systems
i
o
c n
3-14
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
mt10050_g NX 4
Coordinate Systems
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
3-15
Coordinate Systems
Choose InformationObject.
Select the lower edge of the part shown.
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
Choose OK
in the upper left corner of graphics window
(or MB2) to accept the selected edge.
.nu
T
r
w i
=
=
Line
0.000000000
33.000000000
Vertex 1
XC = 16.000000000
YC = -0.000000000
ZC = -25.000000000
X = 49.000000000
Y = 145.069219382
Z = -33.669872981
Vertex 2
XC = 49.000000000
YC = -0.000000000
ZC = -25.000000000
X = 16.000000000
Y = 145.069219382
Z = -33.669872981
3-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Coordinate Systems
Choose OK.
The WCS moves back to the Absolute origin and orientation.
i
o
c n
om
ce.
Step 9:
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
3-17
Coordinate Systems
Summary
The Absolute Coordinate System is a stationary coordinate system that
defines a fixed point in model space while the Work Coordinate System (WCS)
is a mobile coordinate system that may be moved and reoriented as necessary
to support other functions.
In this lesson you:
Identified the difference between the Absolute Coordinate System and the
Work Coordinate System.
3-18
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
om
Objectives
i
o
c n
.nu
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
4-1
Primitives
A Primitive is a solid object that is analytic in nature. A Primitive may be
thought of as "raw stock" to which material will be added or removed to
achieve the finished part. There are multiple ways of defining each of the four
Primitive types. Primitives may be used as the basic shape at the start of
the solid modeling process.
When a Primitive is created, its type and its size must be specified as well as
its location and orientation in model space.
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
om
Block
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
a
ww l
V
4-2
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
mt10050_g NX 4
Block
A Block may be created by specifying the size and location of the block in
model space. The orientation will be implied from the orientation of the WCS.
ce.
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
There are three different methods that may be used to create a Block, Origin
Edge Lengths, Two Points Height, and Two Diagonal Points. The middle
portion of the dialog and the Selection Steps change depending on the type
of Block creation method you choose. This lesson discusses the first method,
Origin, Edge Lengths.
Practical Applications of NX
4-3
Specify the origin of the corner of the block. The Snap Point toolbar is
available to access the Point Constructor dialog or to specify a point
relative to existing geometry. The edges of the block will be parallel to
the XC, YC, and ZC axes.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Length, Width, and Height are measured relative to the XC,
YC, and ZC axes of the WCS, respectively. These must be positive
values since they are stored as the parameters of the block.
Choose OK or Apply.
ce.
a
ww l
V
4-4
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
After the block has been created, its size may be changed by editing the
values that were used for edge lengths during creation.
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
Step 3:
Create a Block.
i
o
c n
type is selected.
om
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
Choose MB2.
ce.
T
r
w i
Step 4:
.nu
Practical Applications of NX
4-5
4-6
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Step 5:
om
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Cylinder
A cylinder may be created by specifying the orientation, size and location of
the cylinder. There are two methods to create a cylinder.
Diameter, Height
Height, Arc
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
4-7
Defining Vectors
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
The XC, YC, and ZC Axis options are sufficient for the purpose of
this course.
In the example below, the direction vector is the ZC Axis. The cylinder
is shown created at an origin away from the WCS with a specified
height in the direction of the vector.
4-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
Step 3:
i
o
c n
75
200
ce.
=
=
a
ww l
V
Diameter
Height
om
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose Cancel.
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
4-9
15
150
=
=
4-10
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
Step 5:
mt10050_g NX 4
Summary
This lesson was an introduction to the creation of solid models using primitive
features. If a primitive feature is used, it should be the base feature and there
should only be one in a part because they cannot be associatively positioned.
In this lesson you:
Created a block.
ce.
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
4-11
ce.
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Lesson
Objectives
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
Position features.
.nu
ce.
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
5-1
a
ww l
V
Placement Face
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Form features are used to add detail to a model. These features include holes,
slots, bosses, pads, pockets and grooves. Form features are fully associative
to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. These features
can be accessed by choosing InsertDesign Feature or by adding them to the
Form Feature toolbar.
.nu
T
r
w i
All form features require a placement face. For a groove, the placement face
must be cylindrical or conical. For all other form features, the placement face
must be planar. This planar placement face defines the X-Y plane of the
coordinate system for the feature being created. Features are created normal
to the placement face.
A datum plane may be used as the planar placement face. In the following
example, the datum plane is used as the Planar Placement face for the hole
feature.
5-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
5-3
Angular
Point onto Point
Point onto Line
Line onto Line
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1 Horizontal
2 Vertical
3 Parallel
4 Perpendicular
5 Parallel at a Distance
Only the dimension types that apply to the feature being creating
will be displayed.
5-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Hole
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the placement face. If a datum plane is selected choose the Reverse
Side button as required.
Choose OK or Apply.
Practical Applications of NX
5-5
Hole Types
1 Diameter
2 Depth
3 Tip Angle
Counterbore
1 C-Bore Diameter
2 C-Bore Depth
3 Hole Depth
Countersink
1 C-Sink Diameter
2 C-Sink Angle
3 Hole Depth
5-6
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
i
o
c n
Simple
mt10050_g NX 4
Boss
The Boss feature is used to add a cylindrical shape with a specified height to
a model, having either straight or tapered sides.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1 Diameter
2 Height
3 Taper Angle
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
A positive or negative value may be entered depending on which way the wall
is to incline. A zero value results in a vertical cylinder wall.
Practical Applications of NX
5-7
Positioning Terminology
Fully Specified The feature is uniquely located by the positioning
dimensions specified.
Target Solid The solid body that a Boolean operation acts upon. In the
context of a Form Feature it is the solid body that the Hole, Slot, Pocket or
Groove will subtract from, or a Boss or Pad will unite with.
Target Edge An edge on the Target Solid that is selected for positioning
purposes.
Tool Edge An edge on the Tool Solid that is selected for positioning
purposes.
5-8
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Positioning Methods
Horizontal
Specifies the horizontal distance between two points, one on the target solid
and the other on the tool solid. Horizontal is measured along the X-axis of the
feature coordinate system (the Horizontal Reference). As edges are selected,
the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
T
r
w i
Vertical
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1 Horizontal Reference
2 Target Edge (End Point)
3 Tool Edge (Tangent Point)
Specifies the vertical distance between two points, one on the target solid and
the other on the tool solid. Vertical is measured along the Y-axis of the feature
coordinate system (perpendicular to the Horizontal Reference). As edges are
selected, the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
1 Horizontal Reference
2 Target Edge (End Point)
3 Tool Edge (Arc Center)
Practical Applications of NX
5-9
Perpendicular
Specifies the shortest (normal) distance between a linear edge on the target
solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid. The linear
target edge is always selected first.
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1 Target Edge
2 Tool Edge (Arc Center)
.nu
Specifies that the distance between an edge on the target solid (also datum
planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid is zero.
T
r
w i
5-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Parallel
Specifies the shortest distance between two points, one point on the target
solid and the other point on the tool solid. As edges are selected, the nearest
valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
om
5
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Specifies the distance between a point on the target solid and a point on the
tool solid is zero. This is commonly used to align arc centers (concentric) of
cylindrical or conical features. This method fully constrains their location
since rotation is not a degree of freedom for cylindrical or conical features.
1 Target Edge (Arc Center)
2 Tool Edge (Arc Center)
Point onto Point is the same as the Parallel positioning dimension with
the value automatically set to zero. You can change it to a non-zero
value when you edit the feature.
Practical Applications of NX
5-11
i
o
c n
In this activity, you will create and position hole and boss features.
Step 2:
Step 3:
Create a boss.
om
e
an rs
Step 1:
ce.
a
ww l
V
5-12
Practical Applications of NX
=
=
=
2
.125
0
.nu
T
r
w i
Diameter
Height
Taper Angle
mt10050_g NX 4
Select the top face of the block (1) as the placement face.
Choose OK (MB2).
Step 4:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Notice Perpendicular
is already selected.
Select edge (2) and enter a value of 4.
Select edge (3) and enter a value of 3.
Choose OK. (MB2)
(InsertDesign FeatureHole)
Practical Applications of NX
5-13
Select the top face of the boss (1) as the placement face and the
bottom face of the block as the thru face.
Choose Apply.
Step 5:
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
5-14
Practical Applications of NX
=
=
=
1
.5
.5
mt10050_g NX 4
Select the top face of the block as the placement face and the
bottom face of the block as the thru face.
Choose Apply.
Step 6:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Verify Perpendicular
is selected.
Select edge (1) and enter a value of 1.5.
Select edge (2) and enter a value of 1.5.
Choose OK (MB2).
1
.5
.5
Practical Applications of NX
5-15
Select the top face of the block as the placement face and the
bottom face of the block as the thru face.
Choose Apply.
Step 7:
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Verify Perpendicular
is selected.
Select edge (1) and enter a value of 1.5.
Select edge (2) and enter a value of 1.5.
Choose OK (MB2).
5-16
Practical Applications of NX
=
=
=
.25
1
0
mt10050_g NX 4
Select the top face of the block as the placement face in the
approximate location shown (1).
Choose Apply.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Choose Horizontal
.
Select a front edge (2) of the block as the
Horizontal Reference, select the edge of the boss (3) as the
target edge, and choose the Arc Center option.
Choose Vertical.
Select the edge of the boss again as the target edge and choose
the Arc Center option.
Key in a value of 1.25.
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of NX
5-17
i
o
c n
Step 8:
e
an rs
Key in a Diameter of 1.
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
Select the right face of the block (1) as the placement face and
left face (2) as the thru face.
Choose OK.
5-18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
.
Choose Perpendicular
Select the bottom right edge (4).
Step 9:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
(InsertDesign FeatureHole)
Key in a Diameter of 7.
Select the top face of the block as the placement face and
bottom face as the thru face.
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of NX
5-19
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
5-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Slot
This option allows you to create a slot in a solid body as if cut by a milling
machine tool. In each case, the shape of the cutting tool corresponds to the
slot type and dimensions.
The slot feature will be created so that the axis of the cutting tool is normal to
the face or datum plane selected. Initially, the path of the slot will be parallel
to the selected Horizontal Reference.
i
o
c n
There are several different slot types available. You will be prompted for the
parameters that apply to the type of slot chosen.
Rectangular Slot
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
1 Length
2 Width
3 Depth
e
an rs
The Rectangular slot type uses a tool that has cylindrical end faces and will
produce sharp edges along the bottom of the slot.
The Width of the rectangular slot represents the diameter of the cylindrical
cutting tool.
The Depth of the slot is measured in a direction parallel to the tool axis from
the placement face to the bottom of the slot. Depth values must be positive.
The Length is measured parallel to the horizontal reference (X in the feature
coordinate system). Length values must be positive.
Practical Applications of NX
5-21
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
Dove-Tail
a
ww l
V
ce.
The Thru Slot option can be applied to all slot types and extends the length of
the slot along the placement face in the direction of the horizontal reference
between two specified faces.
You will be prompted to select starting and ending thru faces instead of a
length parameter. The two thru faces cannot be parallel to the placement face.
.nu
T
r
w i
The rectangular slot shown below was created with the Thru Slot option
enabled. The selected starting and ending thru faces are shaded.
You should not dimension to the end arcs of the slot when positioning a Thru
Slot. The length of a Thru Slot is determined by the selected thru faces. The
only positioning dimension required is to locate an edge or centerline along
the length of the slot (tool) to a target edge or datum. Parallel at a Distance
can be used to constrain the feature and control the two remaining degrees
of freedom.
5-22
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Pocket
The pocket feature is used to create a cavity in a solid body.
There are three types of pockets:
Cylindrical (not covered in this lesson)
Rectangular
Rectangular Pocket
i
o
c n
.nu
a
ww l
V
Length
Width
Depth
Corner Radius
Floor Radius
Taper Angle
T
r
w i
1
2
3
4
5
6
ce.
om
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
5-23
Pad
This option allows a raised pad on a solid body.
There are two types of pads:
Rectangular
Rectangular Pad
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Length
Width
Height
Corner Radius
Taper Angle
e
an rs
1
2
3
4
5
om
5-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Parallel at a Distance
Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also a datum plane or datum
axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be parallel and at a given
distance. This is typically used for features with length (slot, pocket or pad).
om
5
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1 Target Edge
2 Tool Edge (Centerline of Slot)
.nu
T
r
w i
Using Parallel at a Distance will solve two of the three degrees of freedom
necessary to fully specify a feature having a length (rotation and translation
in one direction). Adding another Parallel at a Distance or Line onto Line
dimension would overspecify the location of the feature.
To fully specify the feature in the example an additional positioning
dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal,
Vertical, Perpendicular).
Practical Applications of NX
5-25
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Using Line onto Line will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary
to fully specify a feature having a length (rotational and translation in one
direction). Adding another Line onto Line or Parallel at a Distance dimension
would overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify the feature in
the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve
the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Point onto Line).
Line onto Line is the same as the Parallel at a Distance positioning
dimension with the value automatically set to zero. This zero value
can be changed to a non-zero value when editing the feature.
5-26
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Angular
Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also a datum plane or datum
axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be at a given angle to each
other. The angle is measured in a counter-clockwise direction (with respect to
the feature coordinate system), from the ends of the edges nearest to where
they are selected.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1 Target Edge
2 Tool Edge (Edge of Pocket)
Practical Applications of NX
5-27
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Options are provided to let you specify a value based on a formula, a reference
to an existing value, or a derived value from a measurement without having
to copy and paste or reenter the values.
ce.
a
ww l
V
You can use these options to easily lookup functions and define relationships
between features. You can use values that already exist in your model,
making downstream changes easier and in agreement with your design
intent.
.nu
T
r
w i
5-28
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
In this activity, you will locate a pocket and slot using the Line onto Line and
Parallel at a Distance positioning methods.
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
e
an rs
Step 1:
ce.
a
ww l
V
Choose Rectangular.
.nu
T
r
w i
The design intent is that the length of the pocket be the same
as the Y Length of the block.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
5-29
i
o
c n
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
The parameter for the size of the block appears in the Length
field for the pocket. This p-number may be different in your
part.
5-30
Practical Applications of NX
=
=
=
=
=
1
.25
0
0
0
mt10050_g NX 4
Choose OK.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
5-31
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
The design intent is that the depth of the slot be the same as
the X Length of the block.
.nu
T
r
w i
Length
Width
=
=
1
.55
Press the Tab key to highlight the Depth field (or double-click
in the Depth field).
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Choose Perpendicular
and select the target (3) and the
tool (4) as indicated below. Key in a value of 1.25.
Choose OK.
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
5-33
Groove
The groove feature requires a cylindrical or conical placement face. A groove
can be thought of as a feature that would result from a part being cut in a
lathe. After specifying the groove parameters, you will be shown a preview
of the tool solid. The tool solid can be thought of as the path that the lathe
would make as it cuts the solid.
Positioning a Groove
i
o
c n
You only have to position a groove along the axis of the cylindrical or conical
placement face. The Positioning dialog will not appear. Instead, you are only
required to specify a horizontal dimension along the axis by selecting a target
edge followed by a tool edge or centerline.
5-34
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
1 Target Edge
2 Tool Edge (or centerline)
om
e
an rs
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
Step 3:
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Step 1:
om
i
o
c n
In this activity, you will create a groove feature and position it along the
axis of a cylindrical solid body.
.nu
Choose Rectangular.
T
r
w i
=
=
2.25
.25
Choose OK.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
5-35
om
.nu
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the front outside circular edge (1) as the target edge and
the centerline of the groove (2) as the tool edge.
T
r
w i
Step 4:
5-36
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Double-click the feature or use the MB3 popup menu in the Part
Navigator.
ce.
T
r
w i
.nu
om
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
i
o
c n
The Edit Parameters and Edit with Rollback options allow you to redefine the
parameter values of any parametric feature and update the model to reflect
the new values. To edit the parameters of a feature:
Choose OK until the editing dialogs are dismissed and the model updates.
Practical Applications of NX
5-37
Edit Positioning
This option allows a feature to be moved by editing its positioning dimensions.
In addition, positioning dimensions may be added to features that are either
underspecified or were not given any positioning dimensions at the time
of creation.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Once the feature has been selected, the following options are offered based
upon the positioning status of the selected feature.
With the cursor over the feature in the graphics window, choose
MB3Edit Positioning.
T
r
w i
5-38
.nu
ce.
a
ww l
V
With the cursor over the feature in the Part Navigator, choose
MB3Edit Positioning.
Choose OK until the editing dialogs are dismissed and the model updates.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Add Dimension
This option may be used to add a positioning dimension to a feature.
om
i
o
c n
When adding positioning dimensions, any edge (1) resulting from the
intersection of the feature being positioned (2) and a face on the target solid
(3) may not be selected as the tool edge.
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
The intersection edge is a child object of the tool and target solids face and
is defined by the boolean operation associated with the feature type being
created. The boolean operation does not occur until after the position of the
feature has been defined. Therefore, the intersection edge is not a valid
selection to specify location.
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
5-39
Valid target edges for positioning purposes must belong to features existing
in the feature creation list of the model before the feature being positioned.
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
In the example below the features are numbered in the order in which they
were created. Feature (2) may not be positioned using any face or edge from
feature (3). If an edge or face from feature (3) is selected as a target, a message
is displayed stating that you cannot select an object from a later feature and a
dialog will let you highlight those edges and faces which can be selected.
T
r
w i
.nu
Select the dimension to edit (if there is only one positioning dimension, it
is selected automatically).
Continue editing as many dimension values as desired. Once all the desired
dimension values have been edited, choose OK.
Delete Dimension
Use this option to delete a positioning dimension from a feature. The feature
will then remain in its current location as its position is no longer associated
to the model.
If you are replacing a dimension, add the new dimension before
deleting the old one. The Edit Positioning dialog is maintained when
you add a dimension but is automatically dismissed when you delete
a dimension.
5-40
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Error Messages
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
You can choose Show Current Model followed by the Show Failure
Area option to help identify the problem visually.
Practical Applications of NX
5-41
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
To access the Part Navigator, choose the icon on the resource bar on the right
side of the NX window.
5-42
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
With the cursor over the highlighted hole feature, click MB3
and choose Edit Parameters.
Practical Applications of NX
5-43
With the cursor over the highlighted hole feature, click MB3
and choose Edit Positioning.
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
5-44
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 5:
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
With the cursor over the highlighted hole feature, click MB3
and choose Edit Parameters.
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 6:
Practical Applications of NX
5-45
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
ce.
Because the hole was created as a thru hole, you are limited in
what you can select for a tool edge. In cases where you cannot
select an appropriate tool edge or, if the resulting edge is not
a true circle (like shown at one end), you can use the Identify
Solid Face option.
.nu
T
r
w i
5-46
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 7:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
5-47
e
an rs
Display Dimensions
om
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
ce.
5-48
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
When positioning from edges, select edges that are less likely to be
affected by downstream features and editing operations. This will
reduce the chances of future model update failures.
Practical Applications of NX
5-49
Summary
In this lesson you were introduced to Form Features. Form features are used
to add detail to the model during creation. Form features are fully associative
to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. The different
form features are: Hole, Boss, Pocket, Pad, Slot, and Groove.
This lesson you:
Identified a Placement Face.
5-50
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
Expressions
Purpose
Objectives
i
o
c n
Create Expressions.
Edit Expressions.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
6-1
Expressions
Overview
Expressions are arithmetic or conditional formulas that define the
characteristics of a part. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships
of a model.
Expressions are automatically created when:
a feature is created.
a sketch is dimensioned.
a feature is positioned.
i
o
c n
om
All expressions have a single, unique name and a string or formula that
can contain a combination of variables, functions, numbers, operators, and
symbols.
ce.
e
an rs
Expression names are variables that you can insert in the formula strings of
other expressions. This can be helpful in breaking up lengthy formulas as
well as defining relationships that can be used in place of numbers.
a
ww l
V
Here are some examples of expressions, their formulas and their resulting
values:
Expression Name
Formula
Value
5*width
20
p1+p2*(2+p8*sin(p3))
18.849555921
118
118
T
r
w i
length
.nu
6-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Expressions
ce.
Expression Name
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
3
4
.nu
Formula
T
r
w i
Dimensionality
Units
More Options
Practical Applications of NX
6-3
Expressions
om
ce.
1 Listed
Expressions
2 Expression list
T
r
w i
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
3 Accept Edit
4 Reject Edit
5 Less Options
6-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Expressions
Creating Expressions
There are three methods to create expressions:
Procedure:
Choose the Dimensionality and Units for the expression.
Key in the name of the expression in the Name field and press the
<Enter> key.
Key in the formula for the expression in the Formula field and press the
<Enter> key.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
After keying in the name of the expression the <Tab> or = key can be
used to advance the cursor to the Formula field.
T
r
w i
Procedure:
.nu
Editing Expressions
Choose the expression to modify from the expression list. The expression
will be displayed in the Name and Formula fields.
Practical Applications of NX
6-5
Expressions
T
r
w i
6-6
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Expressions
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
6-7
Expressions
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
ce.
a
ww l
V
Choose ToolsExpression.
T
r
w i
.nu
The dialog lists all of the expressions in the part. Notice the
default expression names p0, p1, and p2 which define the block.
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Expressions
Step 5:
Choose OK.
e
an rs
Choose ToolsExpression.
om
Step 6:
length=8
width=6
height=6/2
=
=
=
i
o
c n
Length (XC)
Width (YC)
Height (ZC)
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
6-9
Expressions
i
o
c n
om
This lists only the expressions in the part that you explicitly
named.
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 7:
e
an rs
T
r
w i
6-10
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
mt10050_g NX 4
Expressions
i
o
c n
om
Step 8:
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
The block will update with the new width and height.
Step 9:
Practical Applications of NX
6-11
Expressions
Summary
Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the
characteristics of a part. All expressions have a name, a formula, and a value
and are used to define the dimensions and relationships of a model.
In this lesson you:
Created Expressions.
Edited Expressions.
T
r
w i
6-12
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
Shell
Purpose
Objectives
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
7-1
Shell
7-2
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The entire solid body is hollowed during this operation but faces can be
removed to create openings. In the following example, the top face was
selected to be removed.
mt10050_g NX 4
Shell
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Remove Faces icon is initially active by default and you are prompted to
select the faces to remove. You may also enter a Thickness value.
T
r
w i
After the selecting faces to remove, the resulting solid previews in the
graphics window. The Thickness can be adjusted by dragging the handle (1)
to the desired value or keying in the value in the dynamic input field (2).
Practical Applications of NX
7-3
Shell
Initially, the drag handle will point inward and a positive value for thickness
will hollow the original solid. To reverse the direction, double click the drag
handle (or use MB3). When the drag handle points outward, a positive
thickness value will create a shell around the original solid.
You may also specify a negative thickness value to create the shell
in the opposite direction of the drag handle.
When you achieve the desired Thickness value and direction , choose OK (or
MB2) to create the feature.
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
The Selection Intent toolbar is available to specify face selection rules while
selecting faces. These rules can be applied to automatically select a collection
of faces in a single step instead of selecting each one individually.
7-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Shell
Step 2:
Step 3:
T
r
w i
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
7-5
Shell
7-6
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the right (1), and back (2) planar faces to remove.
mt10050_g NX 4
Shell
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Choose OK (MB2).
Step 6:
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 5:
Practical Applications of NX
7-7
Shell
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
Step 2:
Step 3:
(InsertOffset/ScaleShell)
7-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Shell
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 4:
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 5:
Practical Applications of NX
7-9
Shell
Step 2:
Step 3:
i
o
c n
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
This will automatically include the right and left faces because
they are tangent.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Shell
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 4:
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
7-11
Shell
Summary
The Shell feature creates a cavity inside, or a shell around an existing solid,
based upon a specified thickness. In addition, selected faces may be assigned
alternate thicknesses.
In this lesson you:
Created a Shell feature with a uniform thickness.
7-12
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
Edge Operations
Purpose
Objectives
i
o
c n
Create Chamfers.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
8-1
Edge Operations
Overview
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
You may also create edge blends and chamfers by first selecting the
edge(s) and choosing Blend or Chamfer from the MB3 pop-up menu.
8-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Edge Operations
Edge Blend
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
After choosing the Edge Blend option, a dialog is displayed and you are
prompted to select a set of edges. You can key in the radius in the Set1 R field.
Practical Applications of NX
8-3
Edge Operations
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
After the selecting edges, the result is previewed in the graphics window. The
radius value can be adjusted by dragging one of the radius drag handles (1) or
by keying in the value in the dynamic input field (2).
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Choose OK, Apply, or MB2 twice to create the edge blend feature.
8-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Edge Operations
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The drag handles for the first edge set disappear and an anchor and label
(Set1) are displayed. You may then select edges to include in the second edge
set (Set2) and specify the radius using the new drag handles or dynamic
input field.
You may continue to define another edge set or complete the blend operation
by choosing OK (or MB2 twice).
Selection Intent
Practical Applications of NX
8-5
Edge Operations
Step 2:
Step 3:
ce.
e
an rs
Step 1:
om
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Select the edge (1), click MB3, and choose the Blend option
from the pop-up menu.
8-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Edge Operations
om
i
o
c n
Key in .75 for the radius and press Enter (or use the drag
handles).
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 4:
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
8-7
Edge Operations
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
8-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Edge Operations
om
i
o
c n
Select the two additional edges on the left side of the part
shown below.
Step 5:
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
8-9
Edge Operations
Chamfer
This option bevels the edges of a solid body by defining the desired chamfer
dimensions.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
8-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Edge Operations
Creating Chamfers
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Chamfer dialog is displayed and you are prompted to select the edges to
chamfer. You can specify an Input Option and offset values in the dialog.
.nu
After edges are selected, you can also use the drag handles or dynamic entry
fields in the graphics window to specify the offsets.
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
8-11
Edge Operations
om
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Asymmetric Offsets
i
o
c n
Symmetric Offsets
You can change the Input Option in the dialog or by highlighting the
drag handle in the graphics window with the cursor and choosing
MB3.
8-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Edge Operations
Step 2:
.nu
Step 3:
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 1:
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
=
=
1.75
30
Practical Applications of NX
8-13
Edge Operations
i
o
c n
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
If your model does not look like the figure below, choose the
Choose Apply.
Step 4:
First Offset
Second Offset
8-14
Practical Applications of NX
=
=
.25
.5
mt10050_g NX 4
Edge Operations
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
If your model does not look like the figure below, choose the
Reverse Offsets icon.
T
r
w i
Choose OK.
Step 5:
Practical Applications of NX
8-15
Edge Operations
Summary
The Edge Blend and Chamfer operations are available to provide additional
definition to the edges of a model. All of the blended edges or chamfered edges
created in a single operation are considered to be one feature.
In this lesson you:
Blended a single edge.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
8-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
om
Objectives
i
o
c n
e
an rs
.nu
ce.
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
9-1
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Different rendering styles are available in the MB3 pop-up menu or View
toolbar to display the part. You can choose from Shaded or Wireframe modes,
with or without edges displayed.
9-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Layers
Layers are used to organize a part. They work like invisible containers to
house the different objects used to create an NX solid model. A layer is a
system-defined attribute that all objects must have.
Work
Selectable (on)
Visible Only
Invisible (off)
om
i
o
c n
There are 256 layers in NX, one of which is always the Work Layer. Any of
the layers can be assigned to one of four classifications of status:
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
The Work Layer is the layer that objects are created on and is always visible
and selectable while it remains the Work Layer. Layer 1 is the default Work
Layer when a new part is created. When the Work Layer is changed, the
previous Work Layer automatically becomes Selectable and could then be
assigned a different status.
.nu
T
r
w i
The number of objects on one layer is not limited. You may choose which
layers to create objects on and what the status will be. However, employing
company standards for the use of layers is recommended.
Practical Applications of NX
9-3
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
To assign a status to a layer or layers, choose the Layer Settings icon from the
Utility toolbar or choose FormatLayer Settings from the menu bar.
Select a layer from the Layer/Status list area and choose one of the four
options below the list (Selectable, Invisible, Make Work, or Visible Only).
Double-clicking on a layer (other than the work layer) toggles it
between Selectable and Invisible.
9-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Layer Listing The filtering option menu at the bottom of the dialog
allows the Layer/Status listing window to display All Layers, Layers with
Objects, or All Selectable Layers.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
9-5
Layer Categories
The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry
Layer Assignment
Category Name
Solid Geometry
120
SOLIDS
Inter-part Modeling
1520
LINKED_OBJECTS
Sketch Geometry
2140
SKETCHES
Curve Geometry
4160
CURVES
Reference Geometry
6180
DATUMS
81100
SHEETS
Drafting Objects
e
an rs
Sheet Bodies
Layer Assignment
Category Name
101110
FORMATS
Layer Assignment
Category Name
121130
MECH
131150
CAE
Manufacturing
151180
MFG
Quality Tools
181190
QA
a
ww l
V
Drawing Borders
Engineering Disciplines
T
r
w i
Mechanism Tools
.nu
Object Geometry
ce.
Object Geometry
om
i
o
c n
Object Geometry
9-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
9-7
Part Navigator
The Part Navigator is useful to identify the features of the model. Selecting
a feature in the Part Navigator window will highlight that feature in the
graphics window and will also highlight its parent and/or child features in
the Part Navigator. Conversely, selecting a feature in the graphics window
will highlight that feature and its parents/children in the Part Navigator.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
To access the Part Navigator, choose the Part Navigator icon on the resource
bar located vertically to the right of the graphics window.
.nu
T
r
w i
9-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Information
The Information pull-down menu offers a number of options to obtain
information about the model.
InformationFeature
i
o
c n
InformationObject
om
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
InformationExpressionList All
This lists all expressions in the part in the Information window. From the
Information window, the list can be printed or saved to a text file.
This is used to identify expressions that reference other expressions and the
features that they define. The EditFind option within the Information
window can be used to search for a specific expression.
Practical Applications of NX
9-9
Referenced Expressions
If an expression defines a feature directly, the feature name is listed with it in
the Expressions dialog. However, an expression may also be included in the
formula of other expressions. The referencing expressions and features may
be identified by using the List References option in the Expressions dialog.
To use this option:
Choose ToolsExpression.
Select the expression and choose List References in the MB3 pop-up menu.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
An Information window will list the features and other expressions that
are referencing the selected expression.
9-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Distance
This Distance option is used to obtain the minimum distance between any
two objects such as points, curves, planes, bodies, edges, and/or faces.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
After selecting the two objects, a temporary ruler and measurement result
are displayed in the graphics window. The resulting units for the distance
are determined by the setting in AnalysisUnits.
Practical Applications of NX
9-11
Mass Properties
Basic mass properties data can be calculated by choosing
AnalysisMass Properties and selecting the solid body.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The units for the results are determined by the setting in AnalysisUnits.
.nu
T
r
w i
9-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
9-13
i
o
c n
Step 5:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
(MB3Fit)
9-14
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 6:
Practical Applications of NX
9-15
Choose EditFeaturePlayback.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
9-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
9-17
i
o
c n
Now you can see how the various features are dependent on
the datum plane.
om
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
Find the values that control the thickness of the web extrusion.
.nu
Step 8:
T
r
w i
Step 9:
Identify the expression that controls the distance from the large
hole center to the small hole center.
Since the web feature was generated from the sketch geometry, the
obvious place to look for the expression that controls the hole to
hole distance is in the sketch.
9-18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
9-19
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 13: Identify the arc in the sketch that is referencing the expression.
Choose InformationFeature.
Select S21:Sketch(3).
9-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The child objects of the sketch are listed. Notice that Arc2 is
present.
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
9-21
i
o
c n
For the first object, select one of the upper edges of the web.
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
For the second object, select one of the lower edges of the web.
T
r
w i
Choose Library
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
9-23
Summary
In this lesson, you queried a model to determine the creation method and
design intent. These skills are important to review parts created by other
users.
In this lesson you:
Accessed the Part Navigator.
Identified expressions.
Measured a distance.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
9-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
10 Introduction to Assemblies
Purpose
Objectives
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-1
Introduction to Assemblies
Subassembly
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
10
10-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Component Objects
A component object is the entity that contains the pointer that links the
assembly back to the master component part.
A component object can also be a subassembly made up of other component
parts and/or component objects.
An example of an assembly structure is shown below:
1 Top level assembly.
2 Subassembly. This is a component part and has been added to the
top level assembly.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
3 Piece Parts. These are component parts and have been added to the
top level assembly or subassemblies.
4 A Component Object.
Component Parts
A component part is a part which is pointed to by a component object within
an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and is
referenced, not copied, by the assembly.
The term piece part is used to refer to master geometry as it exists outside
of an assembly.
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-3
Introduction to Assemblies
om
3 Controls whether
components are fully or
partially loaded.
ce.
4 Controls what to do if a
component is not found.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
2 Determines which
components will be loaded.
10
10-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Load Method
The Load Method determines where to search for the component parts when
an assembly is opened. There are three possible settings.
As Saved looks for each component part in the same directory it was in
when the assembly was last saved.
From Directory looks for each component in the same directory as the
assembly part.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-5
Introduction to Assemblies
Load States
The Load Options also control whether component parts will be fully loaded,
partially loaded, or unloaded when an assembly is opened. These are referred
to as Load States.
Fully Loaded
A part is fully loaded if all of its data is loaded into system memory.
i
o
c n
All components can be fully loaded by changing the Load Components option
to All Components and toggling off the Use Partial Loading option before
opening the assembly.
Partially Loaded
om
e
an rs
When a part is partially loaded, only the data required to display the part is
loaded into memory. Components will be partially loaded if the Use Partial
Loading option is turned on when the assembly is opened.
Unloaded
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
10
10-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Load Failure
The Abort Load on Failure option specifies what to do if a component part
is not found, based on the current load method.
When turned on, no parts are loaded unless all of the components are
found. The first component that cannot be found will be listed in an error
window.
When turned off, the assembly is loaded along with any of the components
that are found. Those components that are not found will be listed in a
warning window and left unloaded.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-7
Introduction to Assemblies
Choose OK.
e
an rs
om
Step 2:
i
o
c n
(FileOpen)
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
10
10-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Step 3:
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
.nu
Do not close any parts. You will use the assembly in the next
activity.
T
r
w i
Step 4:
ce.
a
ww l
V
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-9
Introduction to Assemblies
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
You may re-size the Assembly Navigator window and use the scroll
bars to see the entire tree structure and all of the columns.
10
10-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Node Display
Each component of an assembly is displayed as a node in the assembly tree
structure. If you select on a node with MB1, the system will highlight the
component geometry in the graphics window.
Each node consists of a check box, an icon, the part name, and additional
columns. If the part is an assembly or subassembly, an expand/collapse box
will also be present.
Icons
om
i
o
c n
ce.
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
The check box provides a quick means of determining a parts status. A check
box also lets you load and show a part with a single action.
No check The part is closed. Clicking on this type of check box:
Loads the component and its children partially or fully, depending on the
load options. Unloaded parents may also be loaded at this time.
Afterwards, the check boxes of the part and its children will contain red
check marks except for those which fail to load, are excluded from a
reference set, or reside on invisible layers.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-11
10
Introduction to Assemblies
Gray check The part is blanked, and at least partially open. It also
appears for unblanked parts which either have an excluded reference set or
are on invisible layers. Clicking on this type of check box:
Unblanks the component, along with any of its children that were blanked.
Afterwards, the check boxes of the part and its children have large red
checks, except for those whose loading failed, who have an excluded
reference set, or are on invisible layers.
i
o
c n
om
Afterwards, the components check box has a gray check and its children
have gray checks (if blanked) or no checks (if unloaded).
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
You cannot close a part by clicking on its check box. To close a part, use the
FileClose option or the Close option in the Assembly Navigator pop-up
menu.
10
10-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
Step 2:
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Step 3:
10
Practical Applications of NX
10-13
Introduction to Assemblies
Close a component.
Choose FileCloseSelected Parts.
i
o
c n
Choose All Parts in Session at the top of the Close Parts dialog.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 5:
e
an rs
Step 6:
.nu
T
r
w i
Do not close or save the part. You will use this assembly in the
next activity.
10
10-14
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
i
o
c n
om
Identifying Components
ce.
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
In the Assembly Navigator, if you click MB1 while the cursor is over a
non-work part whose check box has a red check, that part is highlighted. The
part remains highlighted until you select another part. (Hovering the cursor
without clicking MB1 has no effect.)
.nu
Check boxes of components that are not visible will have a thin gray check
or no check.
T
r
w i
If you hover the cursor over a part that is not visible (e.g., blanked, on
another layer, or unloaded), a box defining the boundaries of the component
appears in the graphics window. The box disappears when you move the
cursor to another part. This only occurs when the Preselect Invisible Nodes
property is turned on.
The Preselect Invisible Nodes property is accessed by clicking MB3
in the Assembly Navigator away from the component nodes and
choosing Properties from the pop-up menu.
Because of configuration differences, you may have to hold MB1 down
for a few seconds before the box displays. In some cases, the box may
not be drawn until you release MB1. Also, the box will not be drawn
if you double-click MB1.
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-15
Introduction to Assemblies
om
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Once a component has been highlighted in the graphics window, the MB3
pop-up menu may be used to choose an available action for that component.
The cursor must be on top of the component for the component-specific pop-up
menu to appear.
10
10-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Designing in Context
Designing in Context is the ability to directly edit component geometry as
it is displayed in the assembly. Geometry from other components can be
selected to aid in the modeling.
i
o
c n
NX allows multiple parts to be open at the same time. This can occur either
implicitly, as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly, or explicitly,
when you use FileOpen. The part that is currently displayed in the graphics
window, whether it be an assembly or component, is called the Displayed Part.
There are several ways to change the displayed part:
Choose Window and selecting a part from the Loaded Part List, which
contains up to the last ten loaded parts.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
Select the component from the graphics window and use the MB3 pop-up
menu.
e
an rs
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-17
Introduction to Assemblies
Window
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Choosing WindowMore will display the Change Window dialog which lists
all partially and fully loaded parts other than the current displayed part.
Choosing it from the list of loaded parts. You may enter a portion of the
part name in the Search Text field to help find the part in the list. The
Options button can be used to specify how to perform the search.
Selecting geometry in the graphics window (if the current displayed part
is an assembly).
10
10-18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Select the component from the graphics window and use the MB3 pop-up
menu.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-19
Introduction to Assemblies
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
If a component has already been selected, choosing the Make Work Part icon
will immediately make it the work part. If no component has been selected,
the Set Work Part dialog is displayed. This dialog allows you to select a
component from a list or enter a name.
Choosing the Displayed Part option changes the work part back to
the displayed assembly. This makes the displayed part and the work
part the same.
10
10-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
If you position the cursor over a node in the Assembly Navigator that
represents a component and click MB3, a pop-up menu appears.
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-21
Introduction to Assemblies
Display Parent
om
i
o
c n
Switches the display between currently loaded parts. The displayed part
becomes the top node in the Assembly Navigator.
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
10
10-22
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
i
o
c n
graphics window.
om
Step 2:
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 3:
10
Practical Applications of NX
10-23
Introduction to Assemblies
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
T
r
w i
10
10-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Step 5:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 6:
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-25
Introduction to Assemblies
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
The Save Work Part Only option will only save the work part, even if the work
part is an assembly or subassembly.
ce.
FileSave All saves all loaded parts in the session that have been
modified regardless of the work part designation.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Open parts for which you do not have write privileges will not be
saved.
10
10-26
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Assemblies
Summary
An assembly is a part which contains component objects. It is a collection of
pointers to piece parts and/or subassemblies.
Assemblies provides the ability to design in context.
In this lesson you:
Set Load Options.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
10
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
10-27
10
om
i
o
c n
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
11
Lesson
i
o
c n
Purpose
om
Objectives
e
an rs
ce.
Reposition components.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
11-1
Top-Down Modeling
Top-Down Modeling
As the name suggests, an assembly is created at the top level hierarchy and
parts are filed down the hierarchy, creating subassemblies and components.
i
o
c n
Bottom-Up Modeling
om
e
an rs
11-2
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
ce.
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
11
mt10050_g NX 4
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
The ability to make a component of an assembly the work part while leaving
the assembly itself as the displayed part allows the assembly to be designed
in context. All new geometry that is created is added to the work part. Edits
can be made to the features and expressions residing within the work part.
If a component exists several times in the assembly (i.e. a fastener), any
change to the component while it is the work part will affect all the other
occurrences as well.
Practical Applications of NX
11-3
11
Assemblies Application
11-4
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
11
mt10050_g NX 4
11
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
11-5
11
Assemblies Toolbar
Turning on the Assemblies application will also display the Assemblies
toolbar.
11-6
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Adding Components to an Assembly
A component part may be added to an assembly by choosing the
Add Existing Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar or choosing
AssembliesComponentsAdd Existing from the menu bar. The
Assemblies application must be turned on to access this option.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The component part to add can be specified with the Select Part dialog.
There are several ways to identify a part when the Select Part dialog is active:
Practical Applications of NX
11-7
11
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
After the part is identified, the Add Existing Part dialog appears. This dialog
is used to specify how the existing part will be added as a component object to
the assembly and what information will be stored with the component object.
Reference Set - Allows you to control the amount of data that is loaded from
each component and viewed in the context of the assembly.
.nu
T
r
w i
Layer Options - Defines the layer to which the objects in the new component
will be added in the current work part.
11-8
Work - Places all objects from the component part on the current work
layer.
Original - Places each object from the component part on the same layer
in which it resides in the component part.
As Specified - Places all objects from the component on the layer specified
in the Specified Layer entry field.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Creating a New Parent Assembly
This option lets you create a new parent assembly for your current work part.
The new parent assembly is a completely new part, which becomes the new
displayed part and work part in your session.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
When you choose this option, the New Part File dialog is displayed so that
you can enter a name for the new parent. The former work part is added to
the parent assembly as a component.
Practical Applications of NX
11-9
11
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
Step 4:
i
o
c n
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 5:
11
om
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
Step 6:
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
11-11
Mating Conditions
By applying mating conditions to components in an assembly, you establish
parametric, positional relationships between objects in the components.
These relationships are termed mating constraints.
i
o
c n
In the example shown, if you align the cylindrical face of a bolt to the
cylindrical face of a hole in a block and then move the hole, the bolt will
automatically move with it.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
4 Parallel
2 Align
5 Perpendicular 8 Tangent
.nu
1 Mate
T
r
w i
11
3 Angle
7 Distance
6 Center
FROM / TO
When selecting objects to mate, the Cue line will be directing you to
select FROM and TO objects. The FROM object is part of the component that
is going to move to a new position. The TO object is part of the component
that is remaining in its present location.
11-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Mate Constraint
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
When applying the Mate constraint to components using planar faces and
datum planes, the objects will be oriented so that their normals are parallel
and point in opposite directions. The components will not necessarily have
physical contact but will be coplanar. By definition, a face normal in a solid
body points away from the solid.
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
11-13
11
Align Constraint
i
o
c n
When you apply the Align constraint to components using planar objects
(planar faces and datum planes), the objects will be oriented so that their
normals are parallel and point in the same direction. The components will
not necessarily have physical contact but will be coplanar.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
The Align constraint can also be used to position an edge or curve object of
a component with a planar object (planar face or datum plane) of another
component. A vector will be determined from the edge or curve object and
the objects will be oriented so that the vector and the planar object lie on the
same plane (same behavior as with mate constraint).
Using the CSYS Filter
The Align constraint allows existing coordinate systems to be used as
FROM/TO selection objects. When using the CSYS option, select the FROM
CSYS and then immediately select the TO CSYS. This constraint will remove
all DOFs between the two components.
11-14
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Angle Constraint
Use the Angle constraint when you need to control specific angles between
objects of components.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
11-15
11
Parallel Constraint
Use the Parallel constraint when you need to establish parallelism between
objects of components. Objects that have surface normals associated to them
will be oriented parallel based on those normals.
11-16
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Perpendicular Constraint
Use the Perpendicular constraint when you need to establish perpendicularity
between objects of components. Objects that have surface normals associated
to them will be oriented perpendicular based on those normals.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
11-17
11
Center Constraint
Use the Center constraint to center 1 or 2 objects of a component to 1 or 2
objects of another component.
11-18
Practical Applications of NX
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Center Objects 1 to 2
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Center Objects 1 to 1
mt10050_g NX 4
11
T
r
w i
Procedure
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Center Objects 2 to 2
Practical Applications of NX
11-19
11
Distance Constraint
11-20
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Tangent Constraint
Use the Tangent constraint to define a physical contact between two geometric
objects. There can be multiple solutions to a tangent constraint. To specify
which solution is desired, a help point will be computed from the pick position
on the surface and used to find a unique solution to the tangent constraint.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
Point on Surface.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
11-21
11
11-22
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Choose Preview and then choose Apply (the dialog remains to let you
add more constraints).
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
e
an rs
or
om
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
11-23
11
Vary Constraints
11-24
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Vary Constraints option can be used to reposition the active component
in the Mating Conditions dialog. Existing mating constraints will limit the
freedom of movement. This dialog is similar to the Reposition Component
dialog. A different component can be selected and repositioned by choosing
the Select Component icon.
mt10050_g NX 4
11
om
ce.
e
an rs
Preview
i
o
c n
A Mate constraint applied to the faces shown below, constrains the small
block in the direction normal to the faces. The small block is still free to
translate and rotate in the plane that the two shaded faces have in common.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
The Preview option becomes active after all the objects have been correctly
selected for a constraint. This option lets you preview the solution by
actually moving the component based on the existing constraints. Additional
constraints may still be applied. After previewing the constraint, choose
Apply or OK to accept the constraint or continue creating another constraint.
If the constraint is not correct, choose Unpreview and use the Selection Steps
to define different FROM and TO faces.
Practical Applications of NX
11-25
11
List Errors
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
If there are no degree of freedom indicators visible and the Preview option is
unavailable, you may have tried to define an invalid mating constraint. This
will activate the List Errors option. Choosing it will present information
about the error. The constraint must be deleted and recreated.
T
r
w i
11-26
OK This should be selected only after all constraints have been applied.
This will save the mating condition (and its constraints) and dismiss the
Mating Conditions dialog.
Apply This will apply the constraint and the dialog will remain open.
Cancel This will dismiss the dialog without saving any of the
constraints you added.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Tree Listing
The Mating Conditions Tree Listing list all of the assemblies mating
conditions and constraints. Several options and viewing preferences may
be controlled from the Listing Tree.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Suppress/Unsuppress
Practical Applications of NX
11-27
11
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
From Highlights the FROM object for all constraints of the selected
condition.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
11-29
11
11
Repositioning Components
The Reposition Component option may be used on a component that does not
have any mating conditions, has suppressed mating conditions, or is only
partially constrained. If the component is partially constrained, its mating
constraints will be enforced within the reposition function.
11-30
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Transform Options
The Reposition Component dialog includes the following transform options:
5 Reposition
6 Rotate Between Axes
7 Rotating Between Points
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1 Point to Point
2 Translate
3 Rotate About a Point
4 Rotate About a line
.nu
T
r
w i
These radio buttons let you specify whether you want to move the component
along with the drag handles or just the drag handles. The drag handles can
be repositioned to a specific orientation and used to drag the component along
a specific vector direction or about a specific axis.
Distance or Angle
The Distance input field (or Angle field if a rotation is being defined) lets you
define a distance (or angle) for movement.
Snap Increment
Snap Increment allows snapping to whole-multiple distances when using
the direction or rotation drag handles.
Vector Method
Provides options to define a vector when moving a component using one of
the direction drag handles.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
11-31
11
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Highlight Collision you can continue moving the components, and the
areas that collided are highlighted.
Stop Before Collision the motion stops just before a collision occurs.
The distance between the components when the motion stops depends
on the setting of the Motion Animation slider. The closer the slider is
to Fine, the shorter the distance.
.nu
T
r
w i
11-32
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
11
i
o
c n
There are several ways to reposition a component with the drag handles.
To rotate the component about an axis, select a rotation drag handle (filled
circle) and drag the component while holding down MB1.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
To move the origin of the component to a specific point, select the origin
drag handle (filled square) with MB1 and then select a destination point.
The destination points that can be selected are determined by the Snap
Point toolbar.
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
11-33
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
T
r
w i
11
1 Crank
4 Ramrod
7 Base
2 Shaft
5 Smasher Plate
8 Mount
3 Link
6 Hinges
Step 2:
Step 3:
11-34
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the square drag handle (origin) and while holding down
MB1, drag the shaft to the location shown below, release MB1,
and choose OK.
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose Center.
is
Practical Applications of NX
11-35
11
11
e
an rs
Choose Distance.
om
returns to From.
i
o
c n
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose Align.
11-36
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
.nu
Choose Center.
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
11-37
11
11
Choose Parallel.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
11-38
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Choose the Add Existing Component icon
in the
Assemblies toolbar. (AssembliesComponentsAdd Existing)
Choose Choose Part File.
Select nc_arm and choose OK.
The Component Preview window appears and displays the part.
In the Add Existing Part dialog, verify the following settings:
a
ww l
V
Choose Center.
om
ce.
e
an rs
Choose OK.
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose Distance.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
11-39
11
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
Choose Parallel.
T
r
w i
11-40
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
Step 6:
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Select the square drag handle (origin) and holding down MB1,
drag the crank around in a circular motion and verify that the
shaft and the arm rotate.
Choose MB2 to cancel the repositioning.
Step 7:
Choose Center.
Practical Applications of NX
11-41
11
11
Select the cylindrical face of the link (1) shown below for the
FROM selection.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the cylindrical face of the arm (2) shown below for the
TO selection.
11-42
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 8:
11
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
1
2
3
4
Practical Applications of NX
11-43
11
FROM
TO
Second FROM
Second TO
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Choose Apply.
Set the Center Objects filter to 1 to 1.
11-44
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
11
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Choose Apply.
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
1 FROM
2 TO
Practical Applications of NX
11-45
11
Step 9:
11-46
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
11
Summary
Assemblies may be created using the Top-Down, Bottom-Up, or a combination
of the two methods.
By applying mating conditions to components, you were able to relate their
locations and orientations in an assembly.
The Reposition Component option may be used in preparation for mating
components.
In this lesson you:
Added components to an assembly.
Repositioned components.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
11-47
ce.
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
11
Lesson
12 Datum Features
12
Purpose
Objectives
i
o
c n
This lesson will define datum plane and datum axis features.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
12-1
Datum Features
12
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
In the case where a hole must pierce a cylinder to a certain depth from the
outside of the cylinder, a construction tool is necessary. This tool is needed
because the hole feature requires a planar placement face for creation rather
than the cylindrical face of the base solid.
12-2
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
Datum Features may be accessed from the General Datums and Points menu
in the Feature Operation toolbar or by choosing InsertDatum/Point.
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Datum Planes
The datum plane option allows a planar reference feature to be created that
has many uses.
To define a sketch plane.
To serve as the planar placement face for the creation of form features
(i.e. hole, slot, pad, boss, pocket).
For the mirror plane when using Mirror Body and Mirror Feature.
To define the start or end limits when creating extruded and revolved
features.
To trim a body.
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
12-3
12
Datum Features
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
12
You can also select the objects first and then choose the Datum Plane
option. The constraints will be inferred from the selected objects and
a preview is displayed.
While the datum plane is previewed, you can specify new constraints and
objects or change the parameters using drag handles displayed in the
graphics window.
12-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Cycle Solution
This option allows you to cycle through alternate solutions when more than
one type of datum plane can be created, based on the object selections and
constraints.
Flip Direction
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The datum plane preview displays an arrow conehead in its center that
points in the direction of the plane normal. You can change this direction by
choosing this option or using MB3 Reverse Direction on the conehead.
Practical Applications of NX
12-5
12
Datum Features
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
12-6
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
12
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Select a planar face. A preview of the datum plane displays, with an offset
drag handle.
Select the handle, drag the datum plane to the desired location and
choose OK.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
12-7
12
Datum Features
Choose OK.
12-8
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
12
(InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane)
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Select the cylindrical axis symbol of the cylindrical face in the graphics
window.
Choose OK.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
(InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane)
Practical Applications of NX
12-9
12
Datum Features
Select the edge through which the datum plane is to pass. You may choose
the axis of a cylinder instead of an edge.
Select the planar face or datum plane that the angle will reference.
Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the
desired angle and choose OK.
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
12-10
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
12
(InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane)
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Choose OK.
.nu
ce.
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
12-11
12
Datum Features
12
Choose the Datum Plane icon.
Choose OK.
i
o
c n
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
12-12
om
e
an rs
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Choose OK.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
(InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane)
.nu
T
r
w i
If it is difficult to select points using the Inferred Plane mode, you can
choose the Curves and Points option in the Datum Plane dialog to
prevent the selection of other inferred object types.
Practical Applications of NX
12-13
12
Datum Features
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
12
(InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane)
If, in addition to the curve, you select another face or linear edge, the
direction of the datum plane is defined based on this second object as
follows:
12-14
.nu
T
r
w i
You can alter the datum plane by dragging the handle of the point to
change its position along the curve or keying in a Location value.
for a planar face, the datum plane is made parallel to the object.
for a linear edge, the datum plane is made normal to the object.
for a non-planar face, the datum plane is made parallel to the tangent
plane at the closest point on the surface.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Select a point.
Use the Vector option menu to define a direction, or accept the default. A
preview of the datum plane is displayed.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
In the example below, a point was defined at the arc center of the hole and a
direction was defined using the Vector Constructor dialog.
Practical Applications of NX
12-15
12
Datum Features
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 1:
e
an rs
12
i
o
c n
In this activity, you will create relative datum planes that are associated
to a solid model.
Step 3:
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 2:
12-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Select the top face of the block (1) and confirm the selection if
necessary.
12
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
12-17
Datum Features
12
is
is turned off.
Select the first point (1) and confirm any of the edges. Any of
the edges are acceptable because they share the end point.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 5:
12-18
Create the third datum plane midway between the left and right
faces.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
i
o
c n
12
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
T
r
w i
Choose OK (MB2).
Step 6:
Practical Applications of NX
12-19
Datum Features
12
X Length
Y Length
Z Length
Choose OK.
The revised values are displayed in the graphics window. The
feature may still be modified without updating the model.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 7:
12-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
om
i
o
c n
When a datum plane is selected for the planar placement face, a direction
vector is displayed showing the side of the datum plane on which the feature
will be created. An option is available to reverse the direction when creating
the feature.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
Choose the Edit Feature Parameters icon in the Edit Feature toolbar.
To edit the size of a datum plane, you can drag one of the handles along
its boundaries. These handles appear when previewing the datum during
creation and when editing its parameters.
Practical Applications of NX
12-21
12
Datum Features
12
Choose EditDelete
With the cursor over the datum plane boundary, choose MB3Delete.
Select the datum plane from the graphics window and either press the
Delete key on your keyboard or choose the Delete icon.
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
When positioning a feature or sketch to a datum plane or axis, you cannot use
positioning dimensions that constrain a point to a point, such as a Horizontal,
Vertical, and Parallel dimensions. You can only use dimensions that constrain
a point to a line, such as a Perpendicular dimension, or a line to a line, such
as a Parallel at a Distance dimension.
ce.
a
ww l
V
If a datum plane is selected, the system projects the datum plane until it
intersects with the planar placement face of the target solid. The intersection
between the datum plane and the target face forms a line, which is used
to constrain the feature or sketch.
12-22
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
12
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
T
r
w i
Step 2:
Step 3:
.nu
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
12-23
Datum Features
Move the cursor over the outside cylindrical face of the feature
at the bottom of the part and select the cylindrical axis symbol.
om
i
o
c n
12
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
Step 4:
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
12-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
12
.nu
Step 5:
T
r
w i
Create a hole.
Practical Applications of NX
12-25
Datum Features
(InsertDesign FeatureHole)
Choose Simple.
12
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Choose OK.
i
o
c n
Select the datum plane (2) at the center of the part as the
thru face.
Step 7:
12-26
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
12
Step 8:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The newly created hole will remain centered in the part due
to its relationship with the datum planes that are constrained
to the solid body.
Practical Applications of NX
12-27
Datum Features
12
Step 1:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 2:
Step 3:
12-28
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Select the right edge (1, not the mid point) and confirm the
selection if necessary.
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Select the top face (2), and confirm the selection if necessary.
T
r
w i
Step 4:
(InsertDesign FeatureHole)
Practical Applications of NX
12-29
12
Datum Features
12
Select the boundary of the newly created datum plane for the
placement face.
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the bottom face (1) of the block as the Thru Face.
.nu
T
r
w i
12-30
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Select the edge of the block shown (1), as the target edge.
om
i
o
c n
12
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Select the edge of the block shown (1), as the target edge.
Practical Applications of NX
12-31
Datum Features
om
Step 5:
i
o
c n
12
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
Step 6:
12-32
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
om
i
o
c n
The intent is to create a hole feature that goes through one corner of a
block and comes out the opposite corner and maintains associativity.
Step 2:
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Step 1:
Step 4:
T
r
w i
Step 5:
.nu
Step 3:
Practical Applications of NX
12-33
12
Datum Features
12
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
Step 6:
.nu
Choose OK (MB2).
(InsertDesign FeatureHole)
12-34
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
ce.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the far side of the block as the thru face (2) and choose
OK.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Step 7:
Practical Applications of NX
12-35
12
Datum Features
Click on p2=100.000.
Key in 400.
12
12-36
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 8:
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Datum Axis
This option allows a linear reference feature to be created and has several
uses.
Axis of rotation for revolved features.
Directional reference.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
When you choose the Datum Axis option, the Datum Axis dialog is displayed.
The default constraint type is Inferred so that you can immediately begin
selecting objects in the graphics window to define the axis.
Practical Applications of NX
12-37
12
Datum Features
12
Through an Edge
12-38
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Choose OK.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
(InsertDatum/PointDatum Axis)
Practical Applications of NX
12-39
12
Datum Features
Choose OK.
(InsertDatum/PointDatum Axis)
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
12
12-40
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
The Point on Curve icon in the Snap Point toolbar must be off in
order to create a datum axis through an edge or curve.
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Choose OK.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
(InsertDatum/PointDatum Axis)
Practical Applications of NX
12-41
12
Datum Features
Choose OK.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
12
12-42
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Choose EditFeatureParameters.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
With the cursor over the datum axis, click MB3 and choose Delete.
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
Use EditDelete
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
12-43
12
Datum Features
12
Step 1:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 2:
Step 3:
12-44
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
i
o
c n
12
om
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
Select the back face (2) of the block as shown and confirm.
.nu
T
r
w i
Select the front face (3) of the block as shown and confirm.
Practical Applications of NX
12-45
Datum Features
om
i
o
c n
12
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
12-46
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
i
o
c n
12
om
Step 4:
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
(InsertDesign FeatureHole)
Choose Simple.
Key in .5 for the Diameter.
Practical Applications of NX
12-47
Datum Features
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
12
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Select the center datum plane (1) as shown and choose MB2.
The hole will always remain on the datum axis and stay
centered in the block.
12-48
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Step 5:
om
i
o
c n
12
Choose OK.
ce.
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
The angle of the hole changes, but the point of entry remains
the same.
Step 6:
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
12-49
Datum Features
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
12-50
om
e
an rs
Step 7:
i
o
c n
12
mt10050_g NX 4
Datum Features
Datum CSYS
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
12-51
12
Datum Features
Summary
Datums are reference features that are used as construction tools to assist in
the creation of solid features and sketches in locations and orientations where
planar placement faces do not exist.
12
12-52
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
13 Sketching
13
Purpose
om
Objectives
i
o
c n
This lesson introduces the method of creating a sketch and free hand
sketching of curves.
e
an rs
Identify constraints.
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
Create a sketch.
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
13-1
Sketching
Sketching Overview
What is a sketch?
A sketch is a collection of two-dimensional geometry within a part. Each
sketch is a named collection of 2D curves and points residing on a plane that
you specify. You can use sketches to address a wide variety of design needs.
For example, you might create.
Detailed part features by sweeping, extruding, or revolving a sketch into a
solid or a sheet body.
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
13
ce.
This lesson will focus on the use of sketches to define detailed part
features.
.nu
a
ww l
V
Sketcher tools let you fully capture your design intent through geometric and
dimensional relationships that we refer to collectively as constraints. Use
constraints to create parameter-driven designs that you can update easily
and predictably. Sketcher evaluates constraints as you work to ensure that
they are complete and do not conflict.
T
r
w i
13-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Why sketch?
Sketches provide a high level of control over features and automate the
propagation of changes. You can quickly apply constraints to capture a
well-known design intent.
Once a sketch is placed on a face or datum plane, it will automatically move
when the position of the placement face/datum is changed. Since sketches do
not require constraints, this approach is the quickest way to build features
and still have a sufficient level of associativity.
om
i
o
c n
The inherent ability to solve a sketch in real time means that, as rules are
applied, the sketch objects change and move to reflect the effect that the
assigned rule has on the geometry. This gives you the ability to quickly
change profiles of features created using sketches.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
When there is a commonly used shape that varies in size, a sketch can easily
accommodate the iterations of the design by editing a single constraint.
Practical Applications of NX
13-3
13
Sketching
Sketches should be used as base features of a model if the shape lends itself
to extruded or revolved geometry.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
13-4
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
Sketches may be used in a number of different ways. Consider them for guide
paths for swept features, or as section curves for free form features.
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
An important aspect of modeling that will help you decide how to use a
sketch is defining the design intent of the model. The design intent consists
of two items:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
As a general rule, the more design considerations and potential areas for
change, the more likely there are benefits from sketching.
Practical Applications of NX
13-5
13
Sketching
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
If a sketch is not created from within a feature creation dialog, it will appear
as a separate feature in the Part Navigator.
13-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Sketch Visibility
Organizing the data in a part is an important aspect of modeling. The
sketcher helps in this endeavor by automating the visibility of sketches are
activated and deactivated.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
13-7
13
Sketching
13
om
4 YCZC Plane
7 Datum CSYS
2 Sketch Plane
5 XCZC Plane
8 OK
3 XCYC Plane
6 Datum Plane
9 Cancel
.nu
a
ww l
V
1 Sketch in Place
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
An icon option bar shown below appears in the upper left corner of the
graphics window and contains options to define the sketch plane.
T
r
w i
XC-YC Plane
YC-ZC Plane
ZC-XC Plane
Datum CSYS
Initially, the XC-YC plane will be highlighted in the graphics window. You
can accept this plane or choose one of the other options.
(MB2).
13-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Choose OK.
i
o
c n
13
om
e
an rs
T
r
w i
Choose OK.
.nu
ce.
a
ww l
V
If there is an existing Datum CSYS in the part and it is coincident with the
WCS. The X-Y plane of the Datum CSYS will initially highlight as the default
sketch plane. If you choose the XC-YC, YC-ZC, or ZC-XC option, you will be
asked whether to use the corresponding Datum CSYS plane instead.
Practical Applications of NX
13-9
Sketching
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
T
r
w i
.nu
To specify a new direction, select the axis to redirect and then select a
straight edge. The straight edge is projected to the sketch plane to define
the new direction.
13-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Naming a Sketch
Since a unique name is required for each sketch, a default name will
initially be assigned with a numeric suffix. The format of the default name
is "SKETCH_###" where ### is replaced by the next sequential three digit
number beginning with 000 (SKETCH_000, SKETCH_001, etc.). A sketch
name may be defined during or after the sketch has been created by clicking
on the default sketch name, typing in the new name and pressing Enter.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
13-11
Sketching
Choose the Sketch icon and select the desired sketch from the Sketch
Name pull-down.
i
o
c n
13
T
r
w i
13-12
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
ce.
a
ww l
V
om
e
an rs
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Choose OK.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
Select the face, Datum Plane, or Datum CSYS plane. (You could also
create a relative Datum Plane or Datum CSYS on the fly.)
T
r
w i
.nu
a
ww l
V
Choose OK.
Practical Applications of NX
13-13
13
Sketching
13
Step 1:
Step 2:
Step 3:
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
(InsertSketch)
Choose OK.
ce.
a
ww l
V
(MB2)
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 4:
Step 5:
Step 6:
Step 7:
Step 8:
(SketchFinish Sketch)
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
(InsertSketch)
is already selected.
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Choose OK.
Step 9:
(MB2)
(InsertCircle)
Practical Applications of NX
13-15
13
Sketching
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
(TaskFinish Sketch)
ce.
Step 10: Change the orientation of the face that defines the sketch plane.
a
ww l
V
Choose ToolsExpression.
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose OK.
Rotate the part and notice how the circle remains associative
to the face.
(Home key)
(InsertSketch)
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
i
o
c n
13
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
13-17
Sketching
i
o
c n
13
ce.
(MB2)
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Choose OK.
om
e
an rs
YC
ZC
XC
13-18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
i
o
c n
13
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
13-19
Sketching
13
om
YC
XC
ce.
ZC
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Sketch Curves
Sketch curves are created via the Sketch Curve toolbar. As curves are
created geometric constraints are assigned to the curves relative to the Infer
Constraints Settings.
Profile
Line
Arc
Circle
13
i
o
c n
1
2
3
4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
As you create the curves a symbol will appear near the curve being created to
represent the constraint that will be applied, if any.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
13-21
Sketching
Locking a Constraint
When a constraint symbol appears during curve creation you may lock in that
constraint by pressing MB2. For example, if you are creating a line and the
parallel symbol appears, press MB2. As you move the cursor, the new line
that is rubber banding is doing so parallel to the reference curve.
Snap Angle
The snap angle is a preference setting in the Sketch Preferences dialog that is
applied when curves are being created. It is used to "snap" a line to horizontal
or vertical. The default snap angle is set to 3 and is user definable between
0 and 20. This angular tolerance is defined on either side of horizontal or
vertical from the first specified location, effectively creating a 6 tolerance
zone by default.
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
T
r
w i
When creating lines outside of the sketcher, snap angle only applies
when using inferred cursor location.
The Snap Point toolbar can be displayed when creating most of the curve types
in the sketcher so that you have more control over the selection of locations.
When the Snap Point toolbar is active, regardless of the point types turned
on, cursor location is always available.
13-22
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
ce.
e
an rs
Profile Tool
i
o
c n
13
.nu
a
ww l
V
The Profile tool allows creation of a string of lines and arcs without having to
specify a start for each curve after the first curve is created. The Profile tool
is turned on by default when you first create a sketch and can be accessed by
choosing the Profile icon on the Sketch Curve toolbar.
T
r
w i
The icon options in the upper left corner of the graphics window allow you to
switch between creating lines (1) or arcs (2) and allow you to switch between
Coordinate Mode (3) or Parameter Mode (4). Line creation and Coordinate
Mode are the defaults.
Once you have created the first curve (line or arc), the default will revert back
to Line. You can switch to arc creation by using press-drag-release with MB1.
Practical Applications of NX
13-23
Sketching
The "circle-X" symbol (1) controls the direction in which the arc will be
created.
If the desired arc is in the wrong direction, release MB1, pass the cursor over
the end of the line, and exit in a different quadrant of the symbol.
13
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
As you create curves with the profile tool, the string mode can be broken
by clicking MB2.
13-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Creating Lines
Line creation is accessed by choosing the Line icon on the Sketch Curve
toolbar.
Once in line creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics window
provide two options: Coordinate Mode (by cursor location or keying in an XC
and YC coordinates) and Parameter Mode.
i
o
c n
13
There are several ways to create a line:
Locate the start, and then enter the length and angle parameters.
Locate the start, enter one parameter, and then locate the end.
ce.
a
ww l
V
om
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
Once you indicate a start location, the system will switch to the Parameter
Mode. But, you can still specify an end location without switching back to
Coordinate Mode.
Practical Applications of NX
13-25
Sketching
Creating Arcs
Arc creation is accessed by choosing the Arc icon on the Sketch Curve toolbar.
Once in arc creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics window
give you two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the second is
for the Coordinate/Parameter Mode.
13
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
Arc by 3 Points There are several ways to create the arc with
this method:
Locate the start, enter a radius value and press Enter, locate the end
point, and then move the cursor to preview and choose which of the
four possible solutions to create.
.nu
The same as the previous, but enter the radius value after locating the
end point, but before the point on arc.
T
r
w i
ce.
Locate the start, locate the end, and then locate a point on the arc.
a
ww l
V
Arc by Center and End Points There are several ways to create
an arc with this method:
Locate the center, locate the start point, and locate the end point. (The
start point location determines the radius.)
Locate the center, locate the start point, enter a radius value and press
Enter, locate the end point.
Locate the center, enter radius and sweep angle values and press
Enter, locate the start of the sweep, and specify the direction for the
sweep.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to Parameter
Mode. But you can still specify locations with the cursor without switching
back to Coordinate Mode.
13-26
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Creating Circles
Circle creation is accessed by choosing the Circle icon on the Sketch Curve
toolbar.
Once in circle creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics
window provide two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the
second is for the Coordinate/Parameter Mode.
i
o
c n
13
There are two different circle creation options:
om
e
an rs
Locate the center, enter a Diameter, and press Enter. The circle is
created. You are then in multiple circle creation mode - just indicate
another location for a circle center.
.nu
Locate the center, drag the radius until you get the size you want.
Press Enter. The circle is created, and you are in multiple circle
creation mode. Indicate another center.
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to the enter
Parameters mode. But you can still give a location without changing
back to XY.
Practical Applications of NX
13-27
Sketching
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 4:
i
o
c n
13
Step 1:
Choose OK
ce.
Step 5:
(InsertSketch)
om
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
13-28
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
Create a Profile.
e
an rs
Step 7:
i
o
c n
Choose OK.
13
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
In this step you will create the sketch curves shown below using
the Profile tool.
Practical Applications of NX
13-29
Sketching
13
i
o
c n
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor straight up from the end
point of the last line and then release.
You are now in Arc creation mode.
13-30
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
i
o
c n
13
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Close the profile by selecting the end point of the first line.
Practical Applications of NX
13-31
Sketching
Optional Challenge
Practice sketching the following profiles:
13-32
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Creating Fillets
Fillet creation is accessed by choosing the Fillet icon on the Sketch Curve
toolbar.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Once in fillet creation, icon options appear in the upper left corner of the
graphics window. The Trim Inputs option (1) determines whether or not the
original curves are trimmed. The Delete Third Curve option (2) determines
whether the middle curve is deleted in a three-curve fillet. The Create
Alternate Fillet option (3) will produce a complementary solution for the fillet
(e.g. a 270 degree arc instead of the default 90 degree arc).
ce.
You can create fillets between lines, arcs or conics. You can also create a fillet
between two parallel lines.
a
ww l
V
Select two curves individually, and drag the size and quadrant.
.nu
Select two curves with a single selection (at their intersection), and then
drag the size and quadrant.
T
r
w i
Select one curve, enter a radius value, and select the second curve.
Select two curves individually, enter a radius value, and the indicate the
desired quadrant.
Drag (with MB1) across the two curves you want to fillet. The size of the
fillet is determined by where the curves are selected.
Practical Applications of NX
13-33
13
Sketching
Quick Trim
This option will allow you to trim any curve to the closest curve in the sketch
and preview the results in preselection color.
i
o
c n
13
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
You can trim multiple curves at one time, by using the "crayon" select method.
Hold down MB1 and drag across the portion of curves you want to trim away.
T
r
w i
You can select a specific curve to trim to, by using Ctrl-select to select the
desired boundary curve. More than one bounding curve can be selected using
this method.
In the example below, both the arc on the left and the spline on the right were
Ctrl-selected as boundary curves. With the cursor on the top line, (between
the two boundary curves), the center section is previewed as the portion to
be removed.
13-34
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
i
o
c n
13
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
If you trim an arc to a line that is tangent, the tangency constraint is retained.
Practical Applications of NX
13-35
Sketching
Quick Extend
This option will extend lines, arcs and conics to the closest curve in the
sketch. The system will preview the results in the preselection color.
The curve being extended must extend to an actual intersection with the
boundary curve.
You can extend multiple curves at one time, by using the "crayon" select
method. Hold down MB1 and drag across the ends of curves you want to
extend.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
.nu
You can also select specific boundary curves by using the control-select
method.
T
r
w i
As with Quick Trim, when you use Quick Extend, appropriate constraints are
automatically created.
13-36
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Step 2:
Step 3:
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
Step 4:
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 5:
Create a 4 mm radius fillet using lines L16 and L20 with a single
selection and trimming the lines.
(InsertFillet)
Practical Applications of NX
13-37
Sketching
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
ce.
Drag the cursor around the screen and notice that you can
select which quadrant you want.
Step 6:
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Create a 4 mm fillet using lines L16 and L17 with a single selection
and do not trim the lines.
Turn off Trim Inputs. (background not highlighted)
13-38
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
13
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 7:
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
The 4.0 Radius value should still be in the text field on the
graphics window.
T
r
w i
With MB1 held down, drag across the two lines as below: (This
is another method of selecting the curves to be filleted. The
curves crossed with the "crayon" are the curves selected.)
Practical Applications of NX
13-39
Sketching
Step 8:
Create another fillet between lines L18 and L20 by using the
"crayon", but this time do NOT use a radius value.
Use Backspace to erase the 4 in the text field.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
13-40
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Step 9:
Create a fillet between lines L18 and L19, and drag the size and
quadrant.
Individually select the lines L18 and L19.
Drag the cursor around the screen.
Select a location to create an arc similar to the one shown below.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
13-41
Sketching
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
.nu
T
r
w i
(EditQuick Trim)
13-42
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor across the two curves as
shown below.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
Step 4:
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
(EditQuick Extend)
Practical Applications of NX
13-43
Sketching
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
ce.
a
ww l
V
The status line informs you that the curve cannot be extended.
This is because there is no other curve that would intersect
the arc.
.nu
T
r
w i
13-44
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Step 5:
Step 6:
Step 7:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
Practical Applications of NX
13-45
Sketching
Sketch Points
Sketch objects are defined by theoretical points. A line, for instance, is defined
by two points. The sketcher attempts to mathematically solve for the location
of the points by analyzing the constraints (rules) that are placed on objects.
The points that the sketch solver analyzes are referred to as sketch points.
By controlling the locations of these sketch points the curve itself may be
controlled. There are various ways to control these points. The sketch points
associated with different types of curves are illustrated in the graphic below.
Fillet
om
Point
a
ww l
V
Spline
Circle
i
o
c n
Arc
Ellipse
ce.
Line
e
an rs
13
.nu
T
r
w i
Degree of freedom arrows are displayed at a sketch point when the solver is
unable to fully determine where the sketch point is located on the sketch
plane based on existing constraints and dimensions. They are only displayed
during the creation of dimensions or constraints.
The DOF arrows can point in both the horizontal and vertical directions. An
arrow pointing to the right means that the sketch point is free to move left or
right in the horizontal direction. An arrow pointing up means that the sketch
point is free to move up or down in the vertical direction.
These arrows provide visual feedback while you are constraining the sketch.
Undefined
in X and Y
Directions
Undefined in Undefined in
Y Direction
X Direction
Defined in
X and Y
Directions
(no display)
13-46
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
DOF arrows are removed as rules are written that define the location of the
sketch points.
Arc - Arcs have sketch points at the center and at either end. These
sketch points as well as the radius of the arc may be defined.
Circle - Circles may have the center point as well as a radius or diameter
defined.
Ellipse - An ellipse may have the location of its center defined; also, the
parameters for the size and orientation of the ellipse are stored for future
editing.
Line - Lines may have the sketch points at either end defined.
Spline - Degree three splines may have their defining points located.
Slopes of the spline at the defining points may also be defined. Splines
that are of a degree other than three may be added to sketches; however,
since their defining points are not located at their knot points, there is no
way to locate their defining points using constraints.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
If any of the sketch points that define a curve are unconstrained, the curve is
displayed in the color specified by the Partially Constrained Curves setting
in PreferencesSketchColors. When all defining points are constrained,
the curve will change to the color specified by the Fully Constrained Curves
setting in PreferencesSketchColors. Theses colors only apply during the
creation of dimensions or constraints.
Practical Applications of NX
13-47
13
Sketching
Dimensional Constraints
Design Intent
The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent.
You do this by creating rules, called constraints, that dictate how sketch
objects will react to changes.
As many or as few constraints as necessary may be applied to cause the
sketch profile to update in the manner desired.
13
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
A dimension controls the size of a sketch object, such as the length of a line or
radius of an arc, or the relationship between two objects, such as a distance
or angle.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
13-48
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
As dimensions are being created, the dimension, its extension lines, and
arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected.
Drag the dimension until it is the correct type, for example horizontal
or parallel.
i
o
c n
Sometimes, a dimension type may be inferred before all of the geometry has
been selected. In this case, continue to select geometry until the correct
dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for the dimension type you
desire and select the geometry again.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
An expression is also created for each dimension. The name (1) and value
(2) of the expression appear in a text box in the graphics window after the
dimension has been placed. You may key in a new name or value. Press
the Enter key to activate the change.
Practical Applications of NX
13-49
13
Sketching
You can use the dialog to help create and edit dimensions. You can change the
value of a dimension by either keying it in or using the slider bar.
13
There are also two option menus to change the appearance of the dimension.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Placement option menu is for defining how the text and arrows of the
dimension will be displayed. Options are for automatic placement of text and
arrows (1), manual text placement with arrows inside the extension lines (2),
or manual text placement with the arrows outside the extension lines (3).
.nu
T
r
w i
The Leader option menu is for defining whether the dimensions leader is
attached to the left (1) or right (2) of the dimension text.
Both of these option menus may be used before, during or after dimension
creation.
Text Height
The Text Height controls the displayed height of the dimension text.
Modifying this value will affect the display of all dimensions in the active
sketch.
The Text Height option can also be accessed by choosing
PreferencesSketch.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Dimension Types
Inferred The dimension type (except perimeter) is inferred based on
the objects selected and the cursor location.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
13-51
13
Sketching
om
i
o
c n
13
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
13-52
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
13
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
13-53
Sketching
Open angle_adj_1.
Step 2:
Step 3:
i
o
c n
13
e
an rs
Choose PreferencesSketch.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
13-54
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
i
o
c n
13
om
e
an rs
Select the horizontal line (1, not endpoint) across the bottom.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
13-55
Sketching
i
o
c n
13
e
an rs
Step 4:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
13-56
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Editing Dimensions
The editing of dimensions may be achieved as follows:
To edit the value or the name, simply double-click on the dimension and
edit the value or the name in the text box and press Enter.
To edit the position, place cursor over a dimension, press and hold down
MB1, and simply drag the dimensions location.
Additional editing that may be done with the Dimensions dialog as listed
below:
Position
ce.
e
an rs
Text placement
Leader side
Text height
om
i
o
c n
Name
Value
.nu
a
ww l
V
The name and value of a dimension may also be edited by using the
Expressions dialog. As dimensions are edited, the constraints are
evaluated and the geometry is modified.
T
r
w i
Delay Evaluation
Evaluate Sketch
Update Model
Update Model forces the model to update without leaving the sketch
function. (The model is updated automatically when you exit from the sketch
environment.) This is available as an icon on the Sketcher toolbar or by
choosing ToolsUpdate Model.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
13-57
13
Sketching
Retain Dimensions
When a sketch is deactivated the dimensions are normally hidden.
Retain Dimensions is a toggle in the Sketch Preferences dialog to retain
dimension display after the sketch is deactivated.
i
o
c n
13
om
e
an rs
Retain Dimensions applies only to the active sketch, thus to suit your needs
you may have a mixture of sketches with and without retained dimensions.
13-58
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Use this setting when you need to display dimensions without an active
sketch, for example to reference expression names between sketches, when
creating features, or for plotting.
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Open angle_adj_2.
Step 2:
Step 3:
13
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
(MB3Fit)
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
13-59
Sketching
Step 4:
Edit a dimension.
Place the cursor over a sketch curve and choose MB3Edit.
Choose MB3Orient View to Model.
Double-click on the 45 dimension.
In the dynamic input field, key in 75 and press Enter.
13-60
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Step 5:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
Practical Applications of NX
13-61
Sketching
Step 6:
(MB3Undo)
13-62
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Geometric Constraints
A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch
object (such as defining a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship
between two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or
perpendicular, or that several arcs have the same radius).
Unlike dimensional constraints, geometric constraints have no editable
numeric values; a constant angle constraint, for instance, simply dictates that
the line stay at the angle it is at when the constraint is applied.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
You may also choose the constraint from an MB3 pop-up menu after selecting
the geometry.
To assign multiple constraints at one time, press the Ctrl key while
selecting the objects. The icon option bar for the constraints will
then remain in the upper left corner of the graphics window after
you choose the first constraint. You can use MB2 or the Esc key to
cancel creation of constraints.
Practical Applications of NX
13-63
13
Sketching
Collinear
Concentric
Constant Angle
Constant Length
Equal Length
Equal Radius
T
r
w i
Horizontal
Midpoint
13-64
om
.nu
Fixed
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
13
Coincident
Parallel
Perpendicular
Point on Curve
Point on String
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Scale, Uniform
Slope of Curve
Tangent
Vertical
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
Scale,
NonUniform
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
The Show All Constraints option will display the symbols for all the
constraints in the active sketch.
T
r
w i
Constant Angle
Collinear
Concentric
Horizontal
Tangent
Vertical
Equal Radius
Parallel
Coincident
Perpendicular
Point on Curve
Equal Length
Midpoint of Curve
Constant Length
Point on String
Mirror
Scale, Uniform
Slope of Curve
Scale, Non-Uniform
If the sketch curves are relatively small (the view is zoomed out), the
symbols may not be displayed. You may need to zoom in to see them.
Practical Applications of NX
13-65
13
Sketching
Show/Remove Constraints
Show/Remove Constraints helps you manage constraints. The constraints
may be listed by object(s) or all of the constraints of the active sketch may
be listed at once.
1 List all constraints
or by object(s).
13
i
o
c n
om
ce.
4 Category of
constraints to list.
5 Actions to take on the
listed constraints.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
3 Determines if the
filtered constraint types
will be included or excluded.
Constraint Interrogation
While the Show/Remove dialog is displayed, you can determine what
constraints are present by passing the selection ball over a sketch object. If
the object has an associated constraint, the object will be pre-highlighted
along with any other objects that share the constraint. The constraint symbol
will appear next to the sketch objects. If an object which has no constraints
associated with it, it will not highlight.
13-66
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Constraint Categories
There are two major categories of constraints, Explicit and Inferred.
Explicit constraints are constraints that you create by assignment using the
constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. Inferred constraints
are Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and created
during the curve creation process. You have the option to list only Explicit
constraints, only Inferred constraints, or both.
e
an rs
Constraint Listing
om
i
o
c n
13
T
r
w i
Selected Objects
All in Active
Sketch
.nu
a
ww l
V
Selected Object
ce.
Listing Box
Any time there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by
selecting the constraint to highlight it. When the constraint is highlighted in
the list box, the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted
in the graphics window. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons
allow easy navigation through the various constraints. The Up and Down
arrows on most keyboards will mimic this behavior.
Practical Applications of NX
13-67
Sketching
Information
The Information button located on the Show/Remove Constraints dialog will
list all of the constraints in the active sketch to the information window.
This is useful should there be a need to make a hard copy of the constraints
or save them as a text file.
Removing Constraints
Constraints may be deleted by these methods:
Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and select
Remove Highlighted Constraint(s), or just double click them in the list.
Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection toolbar), select the constraint
symbol on the graphics window, and then choose the Delete icon.
ce.
Undo
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
13
a
ww l
V
Undo from the Edit pull-down menu, the Undo icon on the Standard toolbar,
the MB3 pop-up menu, or the accelerator keys. Undo takes the user actions
back one step at a time.
Dragging Geometry
.nu
T
r
w i
13-68
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Constraint Conditions
When either the Dimensions or Constraints option is chosen, the Status line
lists the constraint condition for the active sketch. A sketch may be fully
constrained, under constrained, or over constrained. When the sketch is
under constrained the Status line will indicate the number of constraints
needed.
Sketch needs 4 constraints
Sketch is fully constrained
Sketch contains over constrained geometry
13
om
e
an rs
Fully Constrained
i
o
c n
A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch. Each
time a sketch is evaluated, the system attempts to solve the set of constraints
that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships
with each other.
ce.
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Under Constrained
.nu
Practical Applications of NX
13-69
Sketching
Conflicting Constraints
Dimensional constraints and geometry that are in conflict in the current
configuration with the current constraint set are also highlighted in a
different color. This indicates that the constraint set that has been supplied is
not solvable with the geometry in its current configuration. Constraints may
need to be added or removed in order for the sketcher to be able to solve the
constraint set. The highlight color is determined by the Conflicting Curves
and Dimensions setting in the Sketch Preferences.
13-70
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Open angle_adj_3.
Step 2:
Step 3:
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
(MB3Fit)
e
an rs
i
o
c n
(InsertConstraints)
Practical Applications of NX
13-71
13
Sketching
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
13-72
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Select the six tangent curve pairs near the six points shown
below, two adjacent curves at a time, and apply aTangent
constraint to each pair. Be careful to select on the correct half
of the arc.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
.nu
T
r
w i
Lastly, the two arcs at the top of the slot should remain
concentric.
Practical Applications of NX
13-73
Sketching
Select the two upper arcs (1) and apply a Concentric constraint.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
.nu
The slot should now be constrained such that the angle may be
adjusted while the configuration remains as intended.
T
r
w i
Step 4:
13-74
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Step 5:
(ToolsUpdate Model)
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
Practical Applications of NX
13-75
Sketching
The width of the slot at the bottom of the angled lines is controlled
by the radius at the bottom of the slot.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
Open pipevise_1.
e
an rs
Step 1:
i
o
c n
13
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
Step 5:
(InsertConstraints)
Practical Applications of NX
13-77
Sketching
om
e
an rs
Step 6:
i
o
c n
13
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 7:
(MB3Fit)
Practical Applications of NX
13-79
13
Sketching
13
(InsertConstraints)
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines (1)
at the top of the profile.
Choose Collinear
13-80
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Choose Tangent.
Create another Tangent constraint on the other side of the slot,
selecting the left side of the arc and the left vertical line.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom horizontal line
and the lower endpoint of the line originating from the arc
center.
i
o
c n
om
Choose Midpoint.
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
Select the line (1), shown below, between the midpoint and
the arc center.
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose Vertical.
Practical Applications of NX
13-81
13
Sketching
13
i
o
c n
13-82
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Select the left angled line (1) and the top left horizontal line
(2), avoiding the end points. Place the angular dimension and
change its value to 45.
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Select the right angled line and the top right horizontal line,
avoiding the end points. Place this angular dimension and
change its value to the p number assigned to the other angular
dimension.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
ce.
a
ww l
V
Select the arc at the bottom of the slot. Place the radius
dimension and change its value to .25.
.nu
Select the line connecting the arc center and the midpoint
and place this vertical dimension. Change its value to 1.5 and
choose Enter.
T
r
w i
The Status line now informs you that the sketch is fully
constrained. Remember that it is not necessarily required
to fully constrain the profile if it is updating in the manner
desired.
Practical Applications of NX
13-83
Sketching
Step 9:
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
13-84
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
Step 2:
Step 3:
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 1:
(InsertSketch)
Practical Applications of NX
13-85
Sketching
Choose OK
Step 4:
13
i
o
c n
Choose OK.
a
ww l
V
Step 5:
ce.
e
an rs
Concentric
Coincident
Dimensional Constraints
om
.nu
T
r
w i
(InsertCircle)
13-86
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose MB2.
The two circles are fully constrained because of the dimensional
and geometric constraints that were inferred as you created them.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
13-87
Sketching
Step 6:
(InsertCircle)
Click and drag to create a circle near on left side of the graphics
window. Key in a Diameter value of 0.5 and press Enter.
13
(InsertConstraints)
i
o
c n
Select the arc center of the circle and the horizontal datum axis.
om
e
an rs
ce.
Step 7:
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
13-88
Practical Applications of NX
(InsertConstraints)
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Select the two circles on the left side and choose Concentric.
om
e
an rs
Step 8:
i
o
c n
13
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
(InsertConstraints)
Select the two new circles on the right and choose Concentric.
Practical Applications of NX
13-89
Sketching
Select the arc center of the circles on the right and the
horizontal datum axis and choose Point on Curve.
Select the smaller circle on the left and the smaller circle on
the right and choose Equal Radius.
Select the larger circle on the left and the larger circle on the
13
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
Step 9:
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Step 10: Create the tangent lines on the outer boundary of the gasket.
13-90
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
(InsertLine)
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
13-91
13
Sketching
13
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Reference curves are displayed in a phantom line font and are ignored
during sweep operations.
13-92
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Open seedpart_in.
Step 2:
Step 3:
.nu
Step 1:
T
r
w i
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
(InsertSketch)
Choose OK.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
13-93
Sketching
Step 4:
Choose OK.
Create a rectangle.
e
an rs
Step 5:
(InsertRectangle)
ce.
a
ww l
V
om
13
i
o
c n
Horizontal
Vertical
Parallel
Perpendicular
Coincident
13-94
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
om
Step 6:
i
o
c n
13
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
Highlight the first constraint in the list and use the down
arrow button to browse the constraints.
T
r
w i
Choose Cancel.
Step 7:
Practical Applications of NX
13-95
Sketching
13
i
o
c n
Step 8:
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
(InsertLine)
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
13
i
o
c n
Select the lower horizontal line (not the endpoint) and the
diagonal line (not the endpoint). Indicate a location for the
angular dimension and change the value to 35.
om
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
13-97
Sketching
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
13
a
ww l
V
Notice that the sketch configuration does not change when the
value is modified. The system leaves the geometry in its last
solved state until the over constrained condition is resolved.
.nu
T
r
w i
13-98
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Sketching
Summary
This lesson introduced the concept of sketch creation.
Sketches may be used to define a base feature, guide paths, and additional
associative features to the base feature.
A sketch parametrically controls curves. It can also be defined on a sketch
plane which is associative to a datum plane/face of a model. Both of these
benefits allow you to capture and maintain design intent.
i
o
c n
Constraints are applied to sketch objects in order to capture the design intent.
The level of constraint, partial or full, is determined by the design intent
and what is necessary to capture it.
In this lesson you:
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
13-99
13
ce.
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
13
Lesson
i
o
c n
Purpose
This lesson introduces Swept Features and Boolean Operations.
14
om
e
an rs
Objectives
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
14-1
i
o
c n
14
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
The features/bodies that are created will be associated with both the section
string and the guide string.
14-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Extrude
The Extrude option (InsertDesign FeatureExtrude) allows a feature to be
created by sweeping planar, section string geometry in a linear direction for
a specified distance.
Extruding a Sketch
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
The Start and End extrude distances can then be specified by using the drag
handles or by keying in values in the dynamic input boxes. The Start drag
handle is represented by a sphere (1) and the End drag handle is represented
by a cone (2).
Practical Applications of NX
14-3
14
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
The Extrude dialog is displayed and provides a single user interface to specify
Limits, Offset, Draft, and Boolean operation for an extrusion.
.nu
When you use Extrude, the Selection Intent toolbar is available to establish
rules for selecting a section string.
T
r
w i
You may or may not want to use all of the curves in the sketch as the section
string. To select all of the curves in a sketch in one step, set the Curve option
in the Selection Intent toolbar to Any or Feature Curves. The other rules can
be applied to select a single sketch curve or other collections of sketch curves.
14-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
ce.
om
14
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Extruding a partial sketch is a technique that is used when one sketch may
define multiple features.
Practical Applications of NX
14-5
Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves with another closed set
within the boundary of the first creates a solid with an interior hole.
14-6
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
Extruding a curve or set of planar connected curves which are not closed
creates a sheet body unless offsets are used.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
ce.
om
14
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Step 1:
e
an rs
i
o
c n
In this activity, you will start to create a model for a draglink by extruding a
sketch.
Step 2:
Step 3:
Place the cursor over one of the sketch curves and choose
MB3Extrude.
The default direction for the extrude is normal to the sketch
plane in the +ZC direction.
Double-click the direction vector in the graphics window so
that it is pointing in the ZC direction.
Key in 152.5 for the End value.
Practical Applications of NX
14-7
14-8
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
Step 4:
i
o
c n
Choose OK (MB2).
mt10050_g NX 4
Boolean Operations
Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more
existing solid bodies. If a solid already exists in the part, a Boolean operation
can be specified in the Extrude dialog to combine the new feature with the
existing solid body instead of creating it as a separate solid body.
1 Create
2 Unite
3 Subtract
om
14
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
4 Intersect
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
14-9
Unite
14
e
an rs
Subtract
om
i
o
c n
This option produces one solid body by defining a target solid (1) and tool
solid (2).
14-10
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
This option allows material to be removed from a target solid (1) by using
another solid as the tool solid (2), leaving empty space where the tool solid
existed.
mt10050_g NX 4
Intersect
Boolean Errors
om
14
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
This option results in a solid occupying the volume common to the selected
target solid (1) and tool solid (2).
.nu
T
r
w i
If you attempt to unite a tool solid within a target solid and there is no change
in topology, the following message appears.
If you attempt to unite, subtract, or intersect a tool solid with a target solid
and the two solids do not touch, the following message appears.
Practical Applications of NX
14-11
14-12
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
If you attempt to subtract a tool solid (1) from a target solid and the operation
would produce a zero thickness (2), the following message appears.
mt10050_g NX 4
Until Selected
Until Extended
e
an rs
Through All
om
Until Next
i
o
c n
Value
Symmetric Value
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
14-13
14
14-14
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
When this option is turned on, the dialog expands to let you specify Start and
End offset values. Drag handles (1) and a dynamic input boxes are displayed
with the extrusion preview. The Start offset handle is represented by a sphere
and the End offset handle is represented by a cone. Turn the Offset option off
to remove the offset and handles from the preview.
mt10050_g NX 4
Offset Examples
The values of the Start Offset and End Offset may be positive or negative.
The positive direction is determined by the direction of the End Offset drag
handle (cone).
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
14
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
14-15
a
ww l
V
If the section string included interior holes, the holes would be tapered
in the opposite direction to the outside objects.
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
14-16
ce.
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
When this option is turned on, the dialog is expanded to let you specify a
draft angle. A drag handle (1) and a dynamic input field are displayed with
the extrusion preview. Turn the option off to remove the draft and drag
handle from the preview.
mt10050_g NX 4
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
14
om
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
Step 1:
i
o
c n
In this activity, extruded features will be added to a part using offset values.
Step 2:
Step 3:
Practical Applications of NX
14-17
Step 4:
14-18
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
14
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
in the dialog.
Key in .25 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Turn the Offset option on.
Key in .25 for the End (Offset) value and press Enter.
Practical Applications of NX
14-19
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
Step 5:
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
The selected edge is extruded from its origin, normal to its creation
plane to a distance .25 units. The feature is defined as being .25
units thick measured outside the edge. The thickness was defined
by the values entered in the End Offset fields relative to direction
of the offset drag handle.
14-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
in the dialog.
Key in .075 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Turn the Offset option on.
i
o
c n
Key in .15 for the Start (Offset) value and .275 for the End
(Offset) value and press Enter.
Step 6:
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Choose OK.
ce.
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
14-21
14
Selection Intent
The Selection Intent toolbar is available to specify curve and edge selection
rules for section strings when creating extruded features. These rules can be
applied to automatically select a collection of curves or edges in a single step
instead of selecting them individually.
Curve Options
i
o
c n
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
The cursor changes to a Curve Collecting mode, indicating you can collect
curves or edges. Choose the rule from the pull-down menu that best describes
the action for the design intent of your feature.
14
Any Lets you use the original default intent method to extend a
selection. The default method can vary based on the type of object you
selected. For example, with Extrude the default could be All Curves of
Feature if a curve is selected, and Single if the selected object is an edge.
The Any method lets the controlling feature derive intent based on the
type of object selected.
Single Curve Lets you single-select one or more curves or edges. No
rule is applied to a collection of singly-selected curves, and it is basically
a simple list of objects without intent. You can enhance a collection of
singly-selected curves or edges by moving MB3 over one of the selected
objects and then choosing another rule.
Connected Curves Lets you select a chain of curves or edges that share
endpoints. No rule is applied if the chained curves are non-associative.
The curve intent does not attempt to grow or shrink the chain if curves
are added or no longer form a single chain after an edit to the model.
14-22
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
Face Edges Collects all edges of the face containing the edge you
select. If you already selected an edge using another rule, you can select
an adjoining face to define a collection with the Add All of Face rule.
When you select an edge, the cursor-center location determines which
face is selected.
Sheet Edges Collects all laminar edges of the sheet body you select.
Stop at Intersection
om
ce.
e
an rs
Feature Curves Collects all output curves from curve features, such as
sketches or any other curve features.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Select this option to specify that auto chaining stops not only at endpoints of
the curve or edge but also on intersections with other curves or edges. When
you select a chain, all other curves and edges visible in the selection view are
checked for intersections with the current chain. At each of the intersection
points (that is, where two or more objects meet at a point, either interior or at
an end point) the system bounds the chain.
Follow Fillet
You can use this option to automatically chain a section onto and off of a
tangent arc. This option is available only when you are building a section,
and only for Connected Curves and Tangent Curves chaining intents. If you
select both Follow Fillet and Stop At Intersections, Follow Fillet overrides
Stop At Intersections at branches where it applies
Practical Applications of NX
14-23
14
i
o
c n
This option displays a dialog with other special conditions for the selected
rule.
14
om
e
an rs
ce.
When you clear this option, chaining is a single selection operation and
you select a seed object and all objects that meet the current constraints
(that is, the Chain or Chain Tangent options) are collected.
a
ww l
V
When you select this option, chaining is a two selection operation and you
must select the start and end of the chain before the chain is collected.
.nu
T
r
w i
Tangent Angle (Degrees) Use this option to enter a real number for the
highest possible value you want to specify as tangent degrees.
14-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 1:
Step 3:
om
.nu
Step 2:
T
r
w i
14
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
(InsertDesign
Practical Applications of NX
14-25
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
End (Limit)
.125
Step 4:
14-26
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Open String
14
om
Open section strings will always be swept into a solid body when using
the sweep with offset option.
Only one Section String and only one Guide String may be selected.
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
An open section string swept along a guide path that forms an enclosed
loop will automatically cap the end faces, providing the Modeling
Preferences Body Type is set to Solid.
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
14-27
14-28
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
1 Guide String.
2 Section String that is at sharp corner, a location that should
be avoided.
3 Section String that is located away from a sharp corner and
located on an end point.
4 Two separate line objects that provide the endpoint for the
section string.
mt10050_g NX 4
om
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 1:
14
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part by sweeping a
section string along a guide.
Step 2:
Step 3:
Practical Applications of NX
14-29
Select one of the I-beam sketch curves as the section string (1).
e
an rs
14
ce.
om
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
Choose Create.
14
om
Step 4:
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
(InsertCombine BodiesUnite)
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
14-31
Practical Applications of NX
om
.nu
T
r
w i
14-32
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 5:
e
an rs
14
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
In this activity, you will sweep an open section string along a closed guide
string to create a solid body.
Step 2:
Step 3:
ce.
a
ww l
V
om
e
an rs
Step 1:
14
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
14-33
i
o
c n
Select the sketch of the closed profile (2) as the guide string.
14
om
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
ce.
Verify that the First Offset and Second Offset are set to 0
(zero).
.nu
T
r
w i
The open section string was swept along the full length of the
guide string and the system automatically caps the open ends
to produce a solid body.
14-34
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
14
om
e
an rs
Step 5:
i
o
c n
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
14-35
Revolve
The Revolve option (InsertDesign FeatureRevolve) allows you to create a
feature by rotating a section string about an axis through specified angles.
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
The Revolve feature requires a section (1), a location and direction for the
rotation axis (2), and Start and End angles (3,4). The angles can be specified
by using drag handles, keying in values in the dynamic input boxes, or in
a dialog.
14-36
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
You can also revolve a sketch by placing the cursor over it in the
graphics window and choosing the Revolve option in the MB3 pop-up
menu.
mt10050_g NX 4
om
14
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Revolve dialog is displayed and provides a single user interface to specify
Angular Limits, Offset, and a Boolean operation.
.nu
T
r
w i
When revolving an open section string a full 360, the end faces will be
automatically capped to produce a solid body if the Body Type option is
set to Solid.
The Right Hand rule determines the direction of the sweep. You can
reverse the direction by double-clicking on the axis vector in the graphics
window or by choosing the Reverse Direction icon in the dialog.
Practical Applications of NX
14-37
Step 2:
Step 3:
ce.
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
End
= 360
.nu
Start
T
r
w i
Choose MB2.
14-38
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 4:
i
o
c n
End (Limit)
180
Start (Offset)
a
ww l
V
Choose MB2.
.25
ce.
End (Offset)
14
om
e
an rs
Start (Limit)
.nu
T
r
w i
Notice that the revolution starts at the plane of the curves and
revolves in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the
positive axis of rotation (the Datum Axis). The Right Hand
Rule for Positive Rotation applies.
Step 5:
Practical Applications of NX
14-39
ce.
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
End Angle
90
.nu
Start Angle
T
r
w i
Choose MB2.
Unite the new revolved solid body with the existing solid body.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
(InsertCombine BodiesUnite)
i
o
c n
Select the target (1) and tool solid (2) as shown below.
om
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 8:
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 7:
e
an rs
14
Practical Applications of NX
14-41
Step 2:
Step 3:
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
Step 1:
.nu
T
r
w i
Make layer 24 selectable to view the section string (1) and make
all other layers invisible. Layer 1 will remain the work layer.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
14
om
e
an rs
Choose MB2.
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
ce.
Select the vertical line shown (2) to define the vector for the
axis of revolution.
End Angle
360
Practical Applications of NX
14-43
Step 4:
Unite the new revolved solid body with the existing solid body.
Choose the Unite icon.
(InsertCombine BodiesUnite)
14-44
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
14
om
i
o
c n
Step 5:
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
14
om
Step 2:
e
an rs
Step 1:
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
14-45
i
o
c n
14
ce.
om
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
14-46
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
14
om
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
Step 3:
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
14-47
Summary
Swept features are created by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section
string. The section string may be composed of sketch curves, explicit curves,
solid edges, solid faces, and sheet bodies.
Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more
existing solid bodies.
In this lesson you:
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
14-48
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
14
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
om
Objectives
i
o
c n
Delete features.
Move features.
Rename a feature.
ce.
15
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Practical Applications of NX
15-1
Practical Applications of NX
om
.nu
T
r
w i
15-2
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Part Navigator Many feature editing options are available in the Part
Navigator. You may also use it to review the Model History and feature
dependencies.
a
ww l
V
15
mt10050_g NX 4
Part Navigator
The Part Navigator allows various actions to be performed on features.
Holding down MB3 on a feature node in the Part Navigator displays a feature
specific pop-up menu offering pertinent editing options.
om
ce.
15
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
To access the Part Navigator, choose the icon on the resource bar on the right
side of the NX window.
The options available in the pop-up menu will vary depending on the
type of feature selected. Many of the options are not available if the
Modeling application is not active.
Practical Applications of NX
15-3
Display Dimensions
Choosing Display Dimensions causes the features parameter values to be
displayed (just as they are with Edit Parameters). The temporary display
remains until a Refresh is performed.
Show/Hide
Allows the body or parents for the selected feature to be hidden or displayed.
This function blanks/unblanks the object(s) and their display can be brought
back by using the Show/Hide options or the options under EditBlank.
i
o
c n
The Hide Body option "blanks" the solid body that the feature is applied to.
15
a
ww l
V
om
ce.
e
an rs
The Hide Parents option is more applicable to swept features. If the Hide
Parents option is used on a swept feature, the system will hide (blank) the
parent curves which generated the swept feature. If the swept feature is
derived by a solid edge(s) then the Hide Parents option will hide (blank) the
parent solid body. This option is not effective in showing or hiding "resulting
curves," which are produced directly from a curve feature operation, such
as with Offset Curve.
Filter
.nu
T
r
w i
Provides a quick and easy method for inserting features into a part. This
option may be used to make an existing feature the current feature of the
solid body, and then add more features at that point in the model history. If
this option is used on a feature whose time stamp positions it in the middle of
the model history, making it the current feature, all of the features after it
become inactive. As new features are created they are inserted into the build
hierarchy before the inactive features.
Lets you apply a system filter to the Part Navigator display tree based on the
features currently selected. These filters let you simplify the display tree by
hiding features by type or timestamp order.
To turn off a filter, place the cursor in the Part Navigator away from a
feature node, click MB3, and turn off the Apply Filter option in the
pop-up menu.
Edit Parameters
Lets you edit the features parameters (same as EditFeatureParameters).
15-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
om
Reorder Before/After
15
ce.
e
an rs
Suppress temporarily removes the feature from the body and display. This
can also be accomplished by clearing the checkbox associated with the feature
node in the Part Navigator. The option changes to Unsuppress while a feature
is suppressed. Unsuppress returns the suppressed feature back to the body
and the display.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Nodes may also be dragged and dropped in the Part Navigator window to
perform a feature reorder. Multiple features may be selected by holding the
Ctrl key down during selection.
Group
Same as FormatGroup Features. This option lets you group features into
a special collection called a Feature Set. Members of a Feature Set can be
controlled together during suppress, delete and move feature operations.
Choosing Group causes the Sets of Features dialog to appear. The features
included in the Feature Set can also be hidden so they do not show in the Part
Navigator and can only be accessed under the Feature Set Name.
If you delete a Feature Set, all of its member features are also deleted.
To delete a Feature Set without deleting its members, first remove
the members from the set.
Replace
This allows a features definition to be replaced or "redefined" by another
feature. For example, a surface that is used as a trim face could be replaced
for a different surface without having to delete or redefine several other
features. For more information on replace see the technical documentation.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
15-5
Rename
This option allows you to append a user-defined name to the feature. The user
defined name will appear in addition to the system defined name in the Part
Navigator (i.e. Simple Hole(6) Alignment Hole).
Delete
Deletes the selected feature (same as EditDelete).
Object Dependency Browser
Information
om
i
o
c n
The Object Dependency Browser allows the parent and child relationships of
a feature to be interrogated.
15
ce.
Properties
e
an rs
15-6
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
This option provides access to General and Attribute information for the
feature selected. General properties include the feature name, which can be
edited similarly to the Rename function. Attributes can be added to any
feature to include information which could be called out in a specified column
of the Part Navigator. For more information on feature attributes and Part
Navigator columns see the technical documentation.
mt10050_g NX 4
Deleting Features
You can delete features by selecting the feature and choosing Delete from the
MB3 pop-up menu. The feature can be selected in the graphics window or
Part Navigator.
om
e
an rs
ce.
i
o
c n
If you choose the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar (or EditDelete), an
icon options bar is displayed in upper left corner of the graphics window.
Choosing the Features icon allows you to select features to delete
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
15-7
15
Update Failures
When an edit is made to a feature, the model is updated (or rebuilt) to
incorporate this change. Sometimes the edit may cause a failure in a feature
that occurs later in the model history. The Edit During Update dialog will
appear if an update failure occurs and allow you to resolve the problem.
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
15
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
In the example below, an edit was made to a Shell feature that results in the
removal of an edge that is later blended. After the edit is made, the blend
fails during the model update and the Edit During Update dialog appears.
The options that allow you to advance forward through the model history
(Step, Step To, and Continue) are disabled until the failure is resolved and the
feature successfully updates. You may delete, suppress, or edit the current
feature or step back and edit an earlier feature.
15-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
15-9
15
Show Current Model displays the part of the model that has been
successfully rebuilt.
For performance reasons, the display does not change during update
when an update method other than Show Current Model is used.
After the model update has finished, the display is updated.
Post Recovery Update Status specifies what should happen after an edit
is made during an update failure.
Continue restarts the automatic update process from where it left off.
Pause stops at the next feature after an edit is made and lets you
choose other Edit during Update options, rather than automatically
resuming the update.
15-10
Practical Applications of NX
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
15
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
.nu
T
r
w i
15
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
15-11
om
15
e
an rs
Step 5:
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
15-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 6:
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
(MB3Fit)
Step 7:
Delete a feature.
Practical Applications of NX
15-13
15
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
ce.
15
a
ww l
V
The three holes will be deleted because faces of the slot were
used as their placement face or thru face.
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose OK.
Step 8:
15-14
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
Step 3:
a
ww l
V
om
15
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
.nu
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
15-15
Choose OK (MB2).
om
.nu
a
ww l
V
15
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
The feature that has caused the failure to occur is shown in the
graphics window.
Choose Show Current Model.
The model appears in the graphics window relative to the new
1.75 width value.
15-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
15
ce.
a
ww l
V
Choose Edit
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The reason for the failure is now evident. The hole is positioned
outside the solid body.
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
15-17
a
ww l
V
15
Step 3:
.nu
Step 2:
T
r
w i
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
Step 4:
15-18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
15
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
Press and hold down MB1 on Shell(5) and drag the feature
just below Blend(6).
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
15-19
Press and hold down MB1 on Shell(6) and drag the feature
just below Blend(7).
a
ww l
V
15
Step 5:
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Rename a Feature.
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 6:
15-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
i
o
c n
If Delayed Update after Edit is on, feature updates are delayed while
edits are made. For example, the positioning dimension of a feature may
be changed followed by an edit to the parameters of another feature
without updating the model.
ce.
a
ww l
V
om
If Delayed Update after Edit is off, the part is updated after the
completion of each edit operation. This is the default setting.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
Update Model
Once Delayed Update after Edit is enabled and edits are made, the Update
Model option becomes available so that you can update the model when it is
convenient.
This option is accessed by choosing ToolsUpdateUpdate Model. If this
is an option that will be used often you can add the Update icon to the Edit
Feature toolbar.
The model will be updated automatically when the part is saved.
Practical Applications of NX
15-21
15
Move Feature
The Move Feature option (EditFeatureMove) allows you to move a feature
that is not associatively positioned to a new location.
This option excludes all swept features, relative datum features, and
instance arrays as well as features whose location has been constrained
using positioning dimensions.
Move Feature can be used to move a primitive that is used as the base
feature for the model.
15-22
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
15
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
To a Point
CSYS to CSYS
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Reattaching a Feature
One of the options available for editing under Edit Parameters is Reattach.
Reattach allows the feature references of the feature to be redefined.
A feature reference may be an attachment face, a thru face, a target edge for
positioning, etc. Objects that may have their references redefined include
most form features (holes, pockets, grooves, pads, slots, and bosses), and
linear instance sets of these features, trim faces of extruded and revolved
features, and user-defined features (UDFs).
om
ce.
15
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
In the example below, a pad feature and associated holes are reattached from
the original placement face to a new face.
Practical Applications of NX
15-23
i
o
c n
om
15-24
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
15
ce.
e
an rs
mt10050_g NX 4
Reattach Options
The following options are available to redefine feature references:
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
Specify First Thru Face allows the first through/trim face of the
feature being edited to be redefined.
ce.
15
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Specify Tool Placement Face allows the tool face of a User Defined
Feature (UDF) to be redefined.
In addition, while using any of these redefine feature references options, the
following options on the Reattach dialog are available:
Filter allows filtering of selectable object types including faces, datum
planes, edges, and datum axes. The default is All Types. The list of filter
options available is dependent on the specific Reattach option icon chosen.
Positioning Dimensions A list window displays the types of positioning
dimensions currently on the selected feature. If MB1 is used to select a
dimension in this list, its available references are highlighted in the graphics
window. Double-clicking with MB1 on a dimension in the list allows it to
be redefined.
Direction Reference allows the definition of a new Horizontal or Vertical
feature reference. The default is always set for the existing reference type.
Reverse Direction allows the features reference direction to be reversed.
Reverse Side allows the features normal direction to be reversed when
reattaching that feature to a datum plane.
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
15-25
15-26
Practical Applications of NX
om
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
15
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 1:
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
.nu
a
ww l
V
15
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
In this activity, you will reattach a feature to a new placement face. You will
also move fixed datum features to change the orientation of an associated
body.
T
r
w i
In the graphics window, place the cursor over the pad (Status
line should read Rectangular Pad(6)) and choose MB3Edit
Parameters.
Choose Reattach in the Edit Parameters dialog.
The Reattach dialog displays icons for the selection steps and
other options for reattaching the feature. The icon for Specify
Target Placement Face is active.
The current placement face for the Rectangular Pad feature is
highlighted in the graphics window and the Cue line prompts
you to select a new target face.
Practical Applications of NX
15-27
15
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the lower edge of the face (2) as the horizontal reference.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Select the lower front edge (1) of the solid as the target object.
Select the bottom outside edge of the pad (2) feature as the
tool edge.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Select the right vertical edge (1) of the solid as the Target
Object.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the right outside edge (2) of the pad feature as the tool
edge.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
The holes also move with the pad because they are child
features of the pad. They were placed on a face of the pad and
were positioned relative to the edges of the pad.
The model was created by extruding a sketch. The XC-YC
Plane option was chosen when the sketch was created so
it is attached to a fixed datum plane and constrained to
fixed datum axes.
Now, you have been informed that the sketch should be in
the YC-ZC plane so that part orientation is consistent with
a standard product orientation used at your company. This
can be accomplished by moving the fixed datum features.
The sketch and all of the other dependent features will
move with them.
Practical Applications of NX
15-29
15
Step 4:
e
an rs
Choose EditFeatureMove.
om
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
15
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
Choose XC Axis
15-30
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Choose ZC Axis
om
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 5:
15
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
15-31
Summary
The editing options provide robust capabilities to change design, form, fit, and
function. Because parametric values can be accessed and edited, investment
of parametric design time is not wasted when the need for design changes
occur.
In this lesson you:
Edited features to satisfy design intent.
Deleted features.
15-32
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
15
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
16 Instance Arrays
Purpose
Objectives
i
o
c n
ce.
16
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
Practical Applications of NX
16-1
Instance Arrays
Instance Feature
You can use the Instance Feature option to duplicate existing features and
eliminate repetitive tasks when creating models. This option can be accessed
by choosing the Instance Feature icon from the Feature Operation toolbar or
by choosing InsertAssociative CopyInstance from the menu bar.
An Instance is a shape linked feature, similar to a copy. The Instance not only
duplicates the feature but preserves the parameters of the feature.
i
o
c n
Since all instances of a feature are associated, the parameters of the original
feature may be edited and the changes are reflected in every instance of the
feature. The instance itself is also a parametric feature so parameters such
as the number of instances and spacing may be edited.
Rectangular Array
Circular Array
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
e
an rs
16
om
T
r
w i
There are three Methods available for creating Rectangular and Circular
Instance arrays:
General
Simple
Identical
16-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Instance Arrays
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
The number of instances for both the XC and YC directions must be a whole
number greater than zero.
1 Hole selected for instance.
Number Along XC = 3
XC Offset = .75
Number Along YC = 4
YC Offset = 1
Practical Applications of NX
16-3
16
Instance Arrays
i
o
c n
.nu
ce.
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
16
om
Once the feature and parameters are specified, a rotation axis must be
defined. The circular instance array will be created in a plane normal to this
rotation axis. There are two ways to define a rotation axis:
T
r
w i
16-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Instance Arrays
om
i
o
c n
There will be a total of six holes in the instance array. Two holes in
the XC direction and three holes in the YC direction.
Step 2:
Step 3:
Orient the WCS so that the XC-YC plane is parallel to the plane of
the array.
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Step 1:
Choose FormatWCSOrient.
.nu
16
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
16-5
Instance Arrays
om
e
an rs
Choose OK.
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 4:
i
o
c n
16
.nu
T
r
w i
General
Number Along XC
XC Offset
1.25
Number Along YC
YC Offset
.687
Choose OK.
A preview of the instance array appears in the graphics
window. Choosing Yes will create the instance as it is shown.
Choosing No will return to the Enter Parameters dialog.
16-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Instance Arrays
ce.
16
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
e
an rs
Step 5:
i
o
c n
Choose Yes.
Practical Applications of NX
16-7
Instance Arrays
Step 3:
om
.nu
Step 2:
T
r
w i
16
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 1:
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The finished part will have four legs that are identical and are to
be equally spaced about center of the cylinder. The figure below
illustrates the Before and After model.
16-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Instance Arrays
General
Number =
Angle
120
Choose OK.
The axis of rotation must be selected. Using a Datum Axis
maintains positional associativity.
i
o
c n
ce.
16
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
om
Step 4:
Symmetric Offsets
Offset
1.5
ON
Practical Applications of NX
16-9
Instance Arrays
om
e
an rs
ce.
Step 5:
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
Place the cursor over any of the instanced features and choose
MB3Edit Parameters.
T
r
w i
16
.nu
General
Number =
Angle
90
16-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Instance Arrays
om
16
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
e
an rs
a
ww l
V
Step 6:
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
16-11
Instance Arrays
Step 2:
Step 3:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
16
.nu
T
r
w i
16-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Instance Arrays
om
e
an rs
Step 4:
i
o
c n
The model contains two identical hole patterns. The center hole
in each pattern is positioned associatively to the relative datum
planes in the part. The hole pattern on the left was created by
specifying a point in space and a vector as the rotation axis. The
pattern on the right was created by selecting a datum axis as the
rotation axis.
ce.
a
ww l
V
Y Length
10
16
.nu
T
r
w i
X Length
Z Length
Practical Applications of NX
16-13
Instance Arrays
The model updates to reflect the change. Notice that the hole
pattern on the left does not move with the datum planes and
center hole but maintains the same position in absolute space.
This is because the hole pattern was created with a non-associative
reference point and direction vector.
T
r
w i
16
Step 5:
16-14
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The hole pattern on the right is associative to the datum axis that
was used to define the rotation axis and updated accordingly.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Instance Arrays
Summary
The Instance functionality duplicates existing features, eliminating repetitive
efforts in the creation of models.
In this lesson you:
Created a Rectangular Instance Array.
om
ce.
16
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
16-15
i
o
c n
ce.
om
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
16
Lesson
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
17
Practical Applications of NX
17-1
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
a
ww l
V
The Master Model Concept is also valuable in protecting the design intent of
the part from inadvertent corruption by a downstream user. The downstream
user will have write privileges to the assembly part, but only read privileges
to the model. The solid model is referenced for the application work, but the
downstream user will not have the ability to change it.
.nu
T
r
w i
Implementing the Master Model concept allows diverse yet dependent design
processes to access the same master geometry during development. The
entire part creation process becomes more efficient, allowing many disciplines
to work at the same time and allowing master model edits to be automatically
updated in non-master parts.
17
17-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Assembly
om
i
o
c n
Drafting
Analysis
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Master Model
N/C
.nu
T
r
w i
Each application uses a separate assembly part. When the Master Model is
revised, the other applications will automatically update with minimal or
no associativity loss.
The design intent of the various design applications can be maintained
through protection of the Master Model.
Practical Applications of NX
17
17-3
i
o
c n
abcd1234_mfg.prt
abcd1234.prt
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
T
r
w i
17
The manufacturing engineer owns the assembly part but does not necessarily
have write access to the master model which is owned by the designer.
17-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
(FileOpen)
Choose Options.
i
o
c n
Step 3:
om
e
an rs
Step 2:
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Zoom in on section view A-A and note the slot width of .88 (1)
and the corner radius of .13 (2). Both dimensions have been
rounded from the model dimensions to two decimal places.
17
Fit the view and note the drawing name, SH1, at the lower
left corner. (MB3Fit)
Step 4:
Practical Applications of NX
17-5
Component Report
Component Name
MM_TAPE_DISP
om
Part Name
mm_tapedisp
C:\parts\mm_tapedisp_dwg.prt
e
an rs
Components of
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
Step 5:
ce.
Choose InformationObject.
.nu
T
r
w i
Place the cursor over the solid body. When the cursor changes
to a QuickPick indicator, choose MB1.
The QuickPick window lists each selectable object and the part
in which it resides.
17
Choose OK.
(MB2)
C:\parts\mm_tapedisp_dwg.prt
C:\parts\mm_tapedisp.prt
1, inherited from component
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
(FileOpen)
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
17
Practical Applications of NX
17-7
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
ce.
17
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Step 11: Zoom in on section A-A again to see the changes to the master
model reflected on the drawing
17-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 4:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 1:
.nu
T
r
w i
17
Step 5:
Step 6:
Practical Applications of NX
17-9
Summary
17
17-10
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
This Master Model approach offers many benefits. Master model parts may
be write-protected and owned by one user or group yet the data can be shared
with other users or groups. Downstream users can access the latest data and
incorporate updates as the part is being developed.
mt10050_g NX 4
Lesson
18 Introduction to Drafting
Purpose
i
o
c n
om
Modify Preferences.
Create Dimensions.
Create Annotations.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-1
Introduction to Drafting
When you add orthographic views, they will automatically be aligned with
the parent view as you create them.
Every view is fully associated with the solid. If the solid is updated, the
views will also be updated.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
i
o
c n
There are a few different ways to create a new drawing sheet in a part that
already contains drawing sheets.
Use MB3 over the drawing node in the Part Navigator and choose
Insert Sheet from the pop-up menu.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
e
an rs
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-3
Introduction to Drafting
Opening a Drawing
There are a few ways to open a drawing:
In the Part Navigator, double click the sheet name or, use MB3 over the
drawing sheet node and choose Open from the pop-up menu.
Choose FormatOpen Sheet and select the sheet name from a list.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
If there are multiple drawings in the part, you can filter the list to include a
specific series of drawings.
18
18-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Editing a Drawing
In NX, the term "drawing" is used to define a collection of views. Think of
each drawing as a separate page in the part. One part can contain many
pages, in other words, many drawings.
To edit a drawing, you can:
Choose EditSheet.
Use MB3 in the Part Navigator to highlight the drawing sheet and choose
Edit Sheet from the pop-up menu.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select the dashed-line border of a drawing sheet with MB3 to access the
pop-up menu and choose Edit Sheet.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-5
Introduction to Drafting
The current state of the displayed drawing affects the options that are
available. You should be aware of the following:
The projection angle can only be changed if no projected views exist on
the current drawing being modified.
You can edit the drawing to a larger or smaller size. You can even edit the
drawing to a size small enough so that a portion of a view falls outside
the boundary of the drawing. However, if you edit the drawing to a size
so small that a member view falls entirely outside the boundary of the
drawing, you will get an error message.
If you need to edit the drawing to a smaller size, but cannot due to the
current position of the views, you will first have to move the views closer
to the drawings origin at the lower left corner of the drawing.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Deleting a Drawing
There are a few different ways to delete a drawing sheet:
In the Part Navigator, select the drawing node with MB3 and choose
Delete.
Choose the Delete Sheet icon from the Drawing Layout toolbar.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-7
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
T
r
w i
Step 2:
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-9
Introduction to Drafting
Choose OK.
om
ce.
T
r
w i
Step 3:
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
e
an rs
Step 4:
i
o
c n
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-11
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 3:
T
r
w i
Step 2:
18
Choose Apply.
The drawing changes to display the new size.
Step 4:
18-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
In this case you want every view on this drawing sheet to display
the part full size.
Leave the upper Scale field set to 1. Change the lower Scale
field to 1, then choose OK.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 5:
e
an rs
i
o
c n
All the views that are present on the drawing assume the new
scale. The positions of the drawing views do not change with
the scale.
.nu
T
r
w i
18
Step 6:
Practical Applications of NX
18-13
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 7:
18
18-14
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
om
e
an rs
The default colors for the foreground and background are black and gray
but any color may be selected.
The Show Widths option displays line widths.
Practical Applications of NX
18
18-15
Introduction to Drafting
In the Part Navigator, place the cursor over the drawing sheet node and
use MB3 to select Monochrome from the pop-up menu.
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
18
18-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
View Preferences
The display of views is controlled by choosing the View Preferences icon or
PreferencesView.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
You can then use the View Preferences dialog to define the display of hidden
lines, silhouettes, smooth edges, as well as section view background lines, etc.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-17
Introduction to Drafting
Hidden Lines
If you turn the Hidden Line option off, Hidden Line is not performed and all
hidden lines in the view will appear as solid lines.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
If you turn the Hidden Line option on, the color, font, and width of the hidden
lines are determined by the settings in the Color/Font/Width menus.
18
The Edges Hidden By Edges option controls the display of edges which are
hidden by other overlapping edges. If this option is turned off, edges hidden
by other edges are erased from the view.
18-18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Smooth Edges
om
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Smooth edges are those whose adjacent faces have the same surface tangent
at the edge where they meet.
T
r
w i
If you turn the Smooth Edges option on, you can use the Color/Font/Width
settings to specify their appearance. You can also use the End Gaps option to
vary the edge intersection appearance.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-19
Introduction to Drafting
Virtual Intersections
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
In the graphics window, place the cursor over the dashed line that
represents the drawing border and choose Add Base View from the MB3
pop-up menu.
i
o
c n
Add Base View is the default option (bold) in the pop-up menu.
So, the base view can be added simply by double-clicking on the
drawing border.
Choose the Add Base View icon in the Drawing Layout toolbar.
ce.
a
ww l
V
om
In the Part Navigator, select a drawing sheet node and choose Add Base
View from the MB3 pop-up menu.
e
an rs
.nu
T
r
w i
When using any of these methods, click in the graphics window to place the
base view on the drawing.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-21
Introduction to Drafting
Scale Provides a means to set the scale of the base view. A pull-down
menu list several preset scales as well as the options to enter a custom
scale or define the scale by an expression.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-22
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
When the Orient View Tool is selected a preview screen is presented along
with several options to orient the model as desired.
1 Rotation Tool
4 Associative Orientation
5 Reset
3 Horizontal Direction
6 Reverse Direction
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-23
Introduction to Drafting
e
an rs
Preview
om
i
o
c n
Once the cursor is moved off the base view the system displays projection
lines. The view may be projected at any angle from the base view however,
the system will snap at 45 increments.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
As you move the cursor around on the drawing the new view may be
previewed as a view border, wireframe, Hidden Wireframe, or shaded image.
To select a preview option click MB3 and choose Preview Style.
1 Projection lines
2 Border preview of new projected view.
18
18-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
During the creation of a projected view the View Creation Options Bar is
displayed in the upper left corner of the graphics screen with several different
options. Displayed below the bar is the Offset dynamic input box.
Base View Allow you to choose a different base view then originally
selected.
T
r
w i
6
7
.nu
ce.
a
ww l
V
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-25
Introduction to Drafting
Choose EditStyle.
i
o
c n
Moving Views
om
e
an rs
A view may be dragged around the drawing by placing the cursor over the
ce.
a
ww l
V
hold MB1
border of the view, when the cursor changes to drag mode,
down and move the view as required. As you move the view in proximity to
another view, alignment lines will appear to aid in the positioning of the
view. The alignment lines will appear relative to the top, bottom, left, right,
or center of the view.
.nu
T
r
w i
If you select more than one view, they can all be moved simultaneously.
18
18-26
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Select the view border with MB3; choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
Use MB3 in the Part Navigator to highlight the view to be removed, and
select Delete from the pop-up menu.
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-27
Introduction to Drafting
Step 2:
Step 3:
i
o
c n
Place the cursor over the edge of the drawing border and
double-click.
om
The View Creations Option Bar appears and the top view is
selected by default. You will use this view for the base view.
e
an rs
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Choose OK.
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-29
Introduction to Drafting
Step 4:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
Step 5:
T
r
w i
18
18-30
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
om
e
an rs
Press MB2.
ce.
Step 6:
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
Move the cursor around the Right view from the 12:00 to the
9:00 position.
Notice that at approximately the 10:00 position, a face in the
Top and Front views highlight as well as the corresponding
edge in the Right view. If you select a location with these faces
highlighted you will create a true auxiliary view of that face.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-31
Introduction to Drafting
i
o
c n
om
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 7:
e
an rs
18
18-32
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Utility Symbols
The Utility Symbols option creates various centerlines, offset center points,
target points, and intersection symbols.
When you choose the Utility Symbol icon (or InsertSymbolUtility
Symbol), the Utility Symbols dialog displays. This dialog allows you to
specify settings that control the utility symbol as you create it. You can also
use this dialog to modify existing symbols.
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
4 Preference Options
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-33
Introduction to Drafting
i
o
c n
4 Cylindrical Face
om
ce.
e
an rs
5 Screen Position
a
ww l
V
Multiple Centerlines
.nu
T
r
w i
This option, when turned on, allows you to create multiple linear or
cylindrical centerline symbols without having to choose Apply after each
object is selected.
You can only apply multiple cylindrical centerlines when the point position
option is set to Cylindrical Face. Thats because the system assumes the
cylindrical objects are all oriented in the same manner and are of the same
length.
18
18-34
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
om
i
o
c n
The Default option resets the preferences to the customer default settings.
You can use this option to set the preferences before creating a new symbol or
to edit an existing symbol.
e
an rs
To edit an existing symbol, select the symbol and choose Default. The default
settings will be displayed in the dialog. Choose Apply to update the symbol.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
You can delete a utility symbol by selecting the symbol from the graphics
window and choose the Delete icon. (EditDelete)
The symbols can be selected at any position. When you delete a utility
symbol, any associated objects such as dimensions are also deleted unless the
Retain Annotation option in PreferencesDrafting is turned on.
Practical Applications of NX
18-35
18
Introduction to Drafting
If the linear centerline contains three or more associated points and all
the associated points are moved, the centerline is automatically resized
and updated. If all of the points are deleted, the centerline is also deleted,
depending on the Retained Annotation status.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-36
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 2:
Step 4:
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 3:
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-37
Introduction to Drafting
om
e
an rs
Step 5:
i
o
c n
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
18
Any holes selected that are not collinear will not be added to the
symbol.
18-38
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
om
e
an rs
Step 6:
i
o
c n
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-39
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
5 Screen Position
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
18
18-40
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Step 3:
Step 4:
om
i
o
c n
Step 2:
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-41
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Select two arc center locations for each of the three centerline
placements shown below:
.nu
T
r
w i
18
18-42
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 5:
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-43
Introduction to Drafting
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Place your cursor over the cylindrical face as shown and select
the face using MB1.
18
Step 6:
18-44
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Dimensions
The various dimensions types may be accessed two different ways.
Choose InsertDimension and then choose the desired dimension type.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-45
Introduction to Drafting
Use the Dimensions toolbar. This toolbar offers a menu of the available
dimension types.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-46
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Annotation Preferences
Dimensions may be displayed in many different ways. Some of the settings
are for appearance, i.e. extension line and arrowhead. Other settings convey
the value of the dimension, i.e. the number of decimal places used to define
tolerance. In general most of the dimensions will share the same appearance.
The Annotation Preferences dialog is used to capture those global settings.
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
Line/Arrow Controls the style and size of leaders, arrows, and extension
lines for both dimensions and other annotations. A preview area provides
a rendition of the symbol with leaders and dimensions.
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
Units Controls the desired unit of measure for dimensions and whether
dimensions are created in single or dual dimension format.
Radial Controls the settings that are unique to diameter and radius
dimensions.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-47
Introduction to Drafting
om
i
o
c n
This option bar accesses many of the same settings found in the Annotation
Preferences dialog that apply to dimensions. However, when changes are
made with this option bar, they only affect the dimensions being created in
the current operation and do not change the global preference settings. The
settings will return to the global condition when you exit dimension creation
or choose Reset (5).
a
ww l
V
ce.
e
an rs
1 Style
4 Annotation
2 Precision (decimal places) 5 Reset
3 Tolerance Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
18
18-48
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
Leader Type
Leader Placement
Opens the Create Leader dialog
Associate Origin with Helper Lines
Alignment Position
Opens the Origin Tool dialog
Annotation Plane
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
This toolbar acts as a filter for selecting points on parts. You can turn icons on
(highlighted) or off in order to limit your selection to specific types of points.
om
i
o
c n
The Two Pick Intersection icon (at the right end of the toolbar) will let you
select any two edges whose intersection you cannot get within the select ball.
(When you turn it on, all of the other icons will be grayed out.)
ce.
e
an rs
You can press the Escape key at any time to release all selected objects. It is
often quicker than using Shift+Select.
a
ww l
V
As you create dimensions it is now very simple to align the dimension with an
existing dimension. To help you do this, the system will provide graphical
cues whenever the origins of the dimensions line up.
.nu
T
r
w i
As you begin to locate the dimension, pass the cursor over the existing
dimension that you want to align to. Whenever the placement image of
the new dimension is aligned horizontally or vertically with the existing
dimension (or other annotation), you will get a dashed help line.
18
If you want the new dimension associated with the existing dimension, make
sure the Associate Origin with Helper Lines icon
by default).
is turned on (It is on
Practical Applications of NX
18-49
Introduction to Drafting
Appended Text
Text may be appended to a dimension while you are creating it.
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
If you want only one line of appended text, you can select the object(s) to
dimension and, prior to locating the dimension, choose one of the Appended
Text options in the MB3 pop-up menu.
a
ww l
V
You may also use the right (after), left (before), up (above), or down
(below) arrow key on the keyboard instead of the MB3 pop-up options.
.nu
T
r
w i
If the text is more complex, you will need to use the Annotation Editor dialog.
You can access the Annotation Editor from the interactive toolbar at any
time, or you can access it after selection of objects (and before locating the
dimension) by using MB3.
To add appended text to a previously created dimension that does not already
have appended text, you can:
18
18-50
Double-click on the dimension, and then use the Annotation Editor icon
in the interactive toolbar.
Double-click on the dimension and then use the right (after), left (before),
up (above), or down (below) arrow key on the keyboard to get the appended
text location you desire. Key in the text and press Enter.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Double-click on the dimension and then use the right (after), left (before),
up (above), or down (below) arrow key on the keyboard to get the appended
text location you desire.
Select the dimension, and then use MB3 on the appended text. You get
the following menu:
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
the Edit Appended Text option will access the Annotation Editor dialog.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-51
Introduction to Drafting
Tolerances
There are several ways to add or edit tolerances.
Prior to creating a dimension (after choosing a dimension icon), you can
choose the Tolerance icon on the interactive toolbar, and set the desired
tolerance type. The Tolerance Values icon is then added to the toolbar. Choose
it and enter the desired values.
While creating a dimension (after selecting the object to dimension), you can:
Set the tolerance type by choosing either MB3Tolerance Type or the
Tolerance Type icon.
a
ww l
V
.nu
Tolerance Values
om
Tolerance Type
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
To add a tolerance later, you can select the dimension and use the methods
shown above.
To edit a tolerance later, you can use one of the following three methods:
18
18-52
Double-click on the dimension to access the dimension bar (in the upper
left corner of the graphics screen).
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Automatic
a
ww l
V
Arrows Out
Arrows In
.nu
T
r
w i
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Text at Angle
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-53
Introduction to Drafting
The other popup menu appears when you double-click with MB1 on
an existing dimension (while in or outside of the dimension function)
and then click MB3.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
When you access this popup menu, the dimension bar also appears in
the upper left hand corner.
The cursor will change to indicate that you are in the editing mode.
18-54
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
If you again double-click (with MB1) on the selected dimension, you will
access the Dimension Style dialog.
Changing the Precision of a Dimension
There are a few ways to change the precision of an existing dimension. After
double-clicking on the dimension:
Choose MB3Nominal Precision.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
Deleting Dimensions
You can use the dimension pop-up menu to delete a dimension or you can
select the dimension(s) to delete, and use the Delete icon.
Practical Applications of NX
18-55
Introduction to Drafting
Step 3:
Step 4:
i
o
c n
Step 2:
in the Dimension
om
e
an rs
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
18
If you select the wrong object, press the Escape key on
the keyboard to deselect, and select again.
Place the dimension by clicking MB1 at the desired location.
If you need to change the style of an existing dimension,
double-click it (to select it), then double-click it again
to display the Dimension Style dialog.
18-56
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Step 5:
om
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-57
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Step 6:
18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
You also need to adjust the placement before you establish the
dimension. You can do this with the MB3 pop-up menu.
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 7:
.nu
T
r
w i
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-59
Introduction to Drafting
ce.
Choose Reset.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
a
ww l
V
dimension.
.nu
T
r
w i
18
18-60
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Text Creation
The Annotation Editor is used to create notes, labels, and GD&T symbols.
You can access the Annotation Editor interface by:
Choosing InsertAnnotation.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Annotation icon option bar and the edit window will be displayed in the
graphics window. However, the small edit window can be enlarged and moved.
1 Annotation Bar
2 Edit Window
3 Annotation Placement Toolbar
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-61
Introduction to Drafting
Creating Notes
om
i
o
c n
The Annotation bar is stationary. It will always remain in the upper left
hand corner.
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
.nu
The above options are also available while locating an annotation, by using
MB3 on the graphics window.
T
r
w i
The Edit Window, found in the upper left hand corner of the graphics window
is also called the "Dynamic Mini-Text Box" because it lets you enter text and
symbols for your notes and labels. The Edit window contains some default
text (which is highlighted).
18
Because this is a window, you can drag any side or corner to change its size or
drag the entire window to a different location. Also, youll see horizontal and
vertical scroll bars appear whenever they are required.
18-62
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
The Annotation Placement toolbar works the same as it does for dimensions.
Entering Text
i
o
c n
To enter text, begin typing over the highlighted text in the Edit window.
om
e
an rs
You can use CTRL-i, CTRL-b, and CTRL-u to for italics, bold, and
underlined text as you compose the note.
ce.
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
After you locate the text, it remains in the edit window for you to use again or
edit for the next annotation.
You can also create a note on a drawing by dragging a .txt file from
an operating system window to the drawing.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-63
Introduction to Drafting
Locate the cursor on the curve/edge/face where you want the arrowhead
located (with the cursor displayed as shown below).
om
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
.nu
Press (and hold down) MB1 and drag the cursor away from the selection
point. A temporary display of the leader will be shown on the screen.
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
If you want a second leader, repeat the second and third steps before defining
a text location with MB1.
You can quickly change a leader location by clicking MB3 over the
leader, choosing Edit Associativity, and specifying the new location.
18-64
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Step 3:
Step 4:
Create a note.
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Step 2:
(InsertAnnotation)
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
18
Press Backspace to remove the text from the Edit window.
Key in your name into the Edit Window. It will be placed in
the title block.
There are no limits on the number of characters per line,
or the total number of characters that can be entered.
Practical Applications of NX
18-65
Introduction to Drafting
Step 5:
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
Because you are currently using the system defaults for the
Lettering preferences, the text alignment position is located at the
mid-center of the note.
Create a label.
.nu
Step 6:
ce.
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
18
18-66
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Drafting symbols
GD&T symbols
User-Defined symbols
Expression values
om
i
o
c n
The Annotation Editor creates notes or labels consisting of text and drafting
symbols. You can include the following in a note or label:
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
Editor icon
e
an rs
You can access the Annotation Editor dialog by choosing the Annotation
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-67
Introduction to Drafting
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
1 Toolbar
2 Text Entry Window
3 Preview Window (Show Preview icon must be selected)
4 Symbol Display and Text Preference Options
18-68
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
As you enter text and symbols, the text and control characters appear within
the Text Entry Window. In this window you may use the formatting options
available on the Toolbar to customize the appearance of your text.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
For example, you may want your name to appear as italic, underlined
letters. As you type, the text will appear in the graphics window and in the
annotation editor preview window (if turned on) as shown.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-69
Introduction to Drafting
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The Annotation Editor dialog contains several options for text formatting.
Some of the more common options are described below.
a
ww l
V
3 Text font.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
18
18-70
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Editing Notes
You can edit text in a previously created note or label by selecting it from the
drawing and using the MB3 pop-up menu.
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
T
r
w i
Helper Lines
.nu
You can also edit annotation objects by double-clicking (with MB1) on the note
or label. You can also use MB1 to select multiple objects (but this will reduce
the options available on the MB3 pop-up menu).
Helper lines act as a guide that allows you to line up notes, labels, dimensions,
symbols, and views to other drawing objects on the drawing. Helper lines
appear as a dashed line.
To use helper lines, move the cursor over the object to
which you want to align as you are placing the new
annotation. The note highlights and helper lines appear.
18
Press and release MB1 to place the annotation at the desired location.
Practical Applications of NX
18-71
Introduction to Drafting
Step 2:
Create a note.
Choose the Annotation Editor icon.
(InsertAnnotation)
om
i
o
c n
ce.
T
r
w i
Step 3:
.nu
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Place the text in the lower left corner of the drawing as shown
below by clicking MB1 at that location.
Choose the Annotation Editor icon from the icon option bar in
the upper left corner of the graphics window.
18
Choose the Clear icon
the editor.
18-72
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
Verify the Font is set to blockfont and the change the Character
Scale Factor to 1.75.
om
e
an rs
Choose Clear
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 4:
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
Pass the cursor over 1/1 so that a dashed alignment help line
is shown.
Place the text in the Date area of the title block.
18
Practical Applications of NX
18-73
Introduction to Drafting
i
o
c n
om
.nu
T
r
w i
ce.
a
ww l
V
Step 7:
e
an rs
If required, drag the 1/1 note down so that the date does not
lay on top of the word DATE.
18
18-74
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Introduction to Drafting
i
o
c n
om
e
an rs
ce.
6. Add the drawing formats; title block, border, revision block, standard
notes (Site dependent)
a
ww l
V
.nu
8. Add the base view, typically top or front (InsertViewBase View and
choose the view to add)
T
r
w i
Practical Applications of NX
18-75
18
Introduction to Drafting
Summary
The Drafting Application provides for the creation of drawings. Views and
dimensions that are placed on a drawing are associative to the solid model
and update when changes are made to the model.
The Annotation Editor interface makes it easy to create, edit and delete notes
and labels. The annotation bar and edit window allows you to work with
notes and labels without opening the Annotation Editor dialog.
In this lesson you:
Modified a drawing.
Created Dimensions.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
18
18-76
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Appendix
A Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
A-1
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 1
A-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 2
Practical Applications of NX
A-3
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 3
A-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-5
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 4
A-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-7
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 5
A-8
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-9
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 6
A-10
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-11
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 7
A-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-13
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 8
A-14
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-15
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 9
A-16
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-17
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 10
A-18
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 11
Practical Applications of NX
A-19
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
A-20
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 12
Practical Applications of NX
A-21
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
A-22
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 13
Practical Applications of NX
A-23
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
A-24
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 14
Practical Applications of NX
A-25
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
A-26
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 15
Practical Applications of NX
A-27
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 16
A-28
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-29
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 17
A-30
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-31
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 18
A-32
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-33
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 19
A-34
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-35
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 20
A-36
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-37
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 21
A-38
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-39
Additional Projects
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Project 22
A-40
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Additional Projects
Practical Applications of NX
A-41
om
i
o
c n
ce.
e
an rs
.nu
a
ww l
V
T
r
w i
Appendix
B Expression Operators
Overview
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
The following information lists the various operators that may be used in
expressions.
B
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
B-1
Expression Operators
Operators
There are several types of operators that you may use in the expression
language.
Arithmetic Operators
Example
Addition
p2=p5+p3
p2=p5p3
Multiplication
p2=p5*p3
Division
p2=p5/p3
Modulus
p2=p5%p3
Exponential
p2=p5^2
Assignment
i
o
c n
p2=p5
<
Less Than
>=
<=
!=
!
Not Equal
Negate
Logical AND
T
r
w i
& or &&
Equal
| or ||
.nu
==
ce.
Greater Than
a
ww l
V
>
om
e
an rs
Logical OR
B
B-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Expression Operators
Associativity
Right to Left
(change sign)
*
Left to Right
+
==
>=
<=
!=
||
=
e
an rs
&&
Right to Left
om
<
i
o
c n
>
ce.
a
ww l
V
.nu
T
r
w i
X = 90 (10 + 30) = 50
B
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
Practical Applications of NX
B-3
Expression Operators
ft
grd
in
km
mc
min
ml
mm
mtr
sec
yd
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
cm
B
B-4
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Expression Operators
Built-in Functions
Built-in functions include math, string, and engineering functions.
Scientific Notation
You may optionally enter numbers in scientific notation. The value you enter
must contain a positive or negative sign. For example, you can enter:
2e+5 which is the same as the value 200000
2e-5 which is the same as the value .00002
i
o
c n
Built-in Functions
arccos
arcsin
arctan
arctan2
ce.
a
ww l
V
om
e
an rs
abs
ceiling
Char
charReplace
.nu
T
r
w i
ASCII
dateTimeString Returns the system date and time in the format Fri Nov
21 09:56:12 2005\n
floor
format
getenv
hypcos
hypsin
hyptan
Practical Applications of NX
B
B-5
Expression Operators
Built-in Functions
log
log10
MakeNumber
max
min
mod
i
o
c n
replaceString
round
sin
ce.
a
ww l
V
sqrt
om
Returns pi
e
an rs
pi()
StringUpper
StringValue
.nu
T
r
w i
StringLower
subString
tan
ug_ functions
B
B-6
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Appendix
i
o
c n
This appendix describes the various Point Constructor methods that may
be used.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Points may be specified in one of two ways: either choose one of the provided,
icons at the top of the dialog, or directly enter the X-Y-Z coordinates in the
fields provided.
Practical Applications of NX
C-1
Inferred Point
Cursor Location
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Depending on where you select when using this option, one of the following
single selection options will be used: cursor location, existing point, end
point, mid point or arc center. This option does not require a selection of the
particular point type for each selection.
ce.
a
ww l
V
Use this option to construct points anywhere on the screen by positioning the
cross hairs and indicating a location. The location defined lies on the WCS
Work plane.
.nu
T
r
w i
Existing Point
Use this option to specify a location by selecting an existing point.
Remember that the point constructor allows locations in model space to
be specified. In the instance where an existing point is being selected it is
generally a case of using that point to aid in the construction of another object
such as a the endpoint of a line, or the location of an object, such as placement
of a drawing border.
C-2
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
C
End Point
i
o
c n
Use this option to specify locations at the end points of existing lines (1),
arcs (2), conics (3), and splines (4).
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
When selecting geometry, place the selection ball near the end point (1) you
wish to select. The point is located at the end of the curve nearest to where it
was selected (see below). Closed curves, such as complete circles, have only
one endpoint because the two ends are at the same coordinate location.
Practical Applications of NX
C-3
C
Control Point
Use this option to locate points at the control points of geometric objects. The
control points, which vary for each object type, include: Existing points, End
points of conics, End points and Mid points of open arcs, Center points of
circles or arcs, Mid points and End points of lines, and End points or Knot
points of splines.
Use the cursor to select objects. Since some objects have more than one
control point, place the cross hairs near the control point desired. The system
locates the control point nearest the position where the curve is selected.
C-4
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
C
Intersection Point
i
o
c n
Use this option to locate a position at the intersection of two curves or at the
intersection of a curve and a surface or plane. If the curves intersect more
than once, the system creates the point nearest to where the second curve
was selected.
a
ww l
V
ZC
YC
om
ce.
e
an rs
When two selected curves are not coplanar with the XC-YC plane the system
creates the point on the first curve (1) selected. By projecting the second
curve (2) parallel to the ZC axis an apparent intersection is calculated and
the point (3) is defined on the first object selected (see below). Projections
are always done along the ZC-axis.
.nu
T
r
w i
XC
Practical Applications of NX
C-5
C
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center
i
o
c n
om
ce.
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
In the example below, selecting with the circumference (1) of the large circle
within the selection ball defines the center point (2) of the large circle.
C-6
Practical Applications of NX
.nu
T
r
w i
Selecting near the center of the large circle (1) will not select the center of
the large circle since the selection ball touches the circumference of the
small circle.
mt10050_g NX 4
C
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
The angle value is entered in degrees. The angle is referenced from the
positive XC axis and is measured counterclockwise in the WCS. The angular
position on the arc or ellipse may also be defined on the unconstructed portion
(2) of an arc or ellipse.
Practical Applications of NX
C-7
C
Quadrant Point
i
o
c n
Use this option to locate positions at the quarter points of an arc or an ellipse.
C-8
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Points may be located at the starting point of the arc or ellipse and then
at quarter-distance intervals along the object. The point located (1) is the
quadrant point nearest to the position selected (2). The quadrant position
may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (3) of an arc.
mt10050_g NX 4
C
Point on Curve/Edge
Use this option to locate positions on a curve or edge by specifying a U
Parameter.
After choosing this option and selecting a curve or edge, the Point Constructor
dialog will display an entry field for a U Parameter.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
C-9
C
Point on Surface
Use this option to locate positions on a surface (face) by specifying a U
Paremeter and a V Parameter.
i
o
c n
After choosing this option and selecting a face, the Point Constructor dialog
will display entry fields for the U and V Parameters.
C-10
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
The U and V Parameters can have values between 0 and 1 to define the
location on the face.
mt10050_g NX 4
e
an rs
Reset
om
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
The Reset button sets the values X, Y, and Z coordinates of the Base Point to
0 and sets the Offset method to None.
Practical Applications of NX
C-11
Offset
i
o
c n
This option allows you to specify a position in model space offset from a
reference position. The offset may be specified in several different methods.
e
an rs
Rectangular Offset
om
Once an offset method has been specified, it remains in effect until another
one is chosen. The default is None (no offset).
ce.
a
ww l
V
The location of the offset point (1) relative to the reference point (2) is
determined by the coordinate system (3) selected and the orientation of that
coordinate system.
.nu
T
r
w i
Z
Y
X
C-12
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Cylindrical Offset
This option allows an offset point (1) to be specified by keying in cylindrical
coordinates.
The offset values for Radius (2), Angle (3), and Delta-ZC (4) are defined
relative to the specified coordinate system and applied as illustrated below.
The radius and the angle always lie in the X-Y plane of the coordinate system
specified.
a
ww l
V
YC
T
r
w i
Spherical Offset
om
.nu
XC
ce.
e
an rs
ZC
i
o
c n
Z
Y
X
Practical Applications of NX
C-13
Vector Offset
ce.
e
an rs
om
i
o
c n
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
This option allows an offset point (1) to be defined along a curve by a specified
arc length distance or a percentage of the total curve path length.
The direction of the offset is determined by the where the curve is selected
relative to reference point. In the example below, the reference point (1) is
in the middle of the curve. Selecting the curve at position (2) to produce
direction (3) and selecting at position (4) to produces direction (5).
C-14
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Appendix
D Customer Defaults
Overview
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
There are utilities and customization files which affect the default interface
and behavior of NX. This appendix covers these topics which would normally
be the responsibility of a system administrator.
Practical Applications of NX
D-1
Customer Defaults
Customer Defaults
Customer defaults are accessed by choosing
FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults.
When NX is first started (out-of-the-box) the defaults are set to User and a
variable points to a user file which may or may not exist. This is an extract
from the log file for a user named nxuser after logging in and starting NX
for the first time:
Processing customer default values file
C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser
/Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions
/NX4/nx4_user.dpv
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
The fact that the file does not exist is of no concern because the path is
writable for the person logged in.
ce.
NX will create the file nx4_user.dpv when and if the user makes a change to
the defaults.
a
ww l
V
If the administrator wishes to prevent the user from changing the defaults,
i.e., set them as User (Read Only), there are various ways to accomplish it:
Define the file in a path to which the user cannot write. The file and the
path need not exist.
D-2
.nu
Create the file and customize it as you wish, and then make it read only.
T
r
w i
Lock one or more defaults at a higher level, i.e. group or site level.
Practical Applications of NX
mt10050_g NX 4
Customer Defaults
om
e
an rs
i
o
c n
There are three levels of defaults that your system administrator can set.
These are site, group, and user. Any of all of these levels may be read-write,
although it is customary to set the site and group levels to read only.
ce.
At the Site and Group levels the dialog displays padlocks beside each default,
enabling the administrator to lock out a particular default for lower levels.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
When a lock is active not only is the text de-emphasized but value change
is prohibited. Even if the site (or a lower) DPV file is writable the value of
a locked default can not be changed until the lock icon has been toggled off
for the given default).
Practical Applications of NX
D-3
Customer Defaults
For example, to lock out the ability to create promotions, the administrator
clicks the lock beside promotions at the site or group level. The icon changes
color and the text is de-emphasized.
i
o
c n
D-4
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
mt10050_g NX 4
Customer Defaults
i
o
c n
The system administrator can use the Default Lock Status to set the global
locked status for all of the customer defaults on all defaults pages. This
allows strategies like All are locked except..." or All are unlocked except...
instead of requiring the assertion of 5000+ individual locks.
om
Locks at the group level change color and the text is de-emphasized.
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
The user then sees all options for Site Standards de-emphasized and
padlocked. No Site Standards may now may be changed at the user level.
Practical Applications of NX
D-5
Customer Defaults
Only the defaults that are changed from the hardcoded settings are saved,
thus the DPV files can be very small in size.
i
o
c n
D-6
Practical Applications of NX
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
When you change defaults the changes are NOT effective immediately.
They will be in effect the next time NX is started.
mt10050_g NX 4
Customer Defaults
There are two possible settings for the user level and one each for the group
and site levels:
Variable
Defaults File Heading
Description
UGII_LOCAL_USER_DEFAULTS
MISCELLANEOUS
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
UGII_USER_DIR
UGALLIANCE Variables
om
e
an rs
UGII_GROUP_DIR
Not defined
UGII_SITE_DIR
UGALLIANCE Variables
Practical Applications of NX
D-7
Customer Defaults
application
udo
Practical Applications of NX
om
.nu
T
r
w i
D-8
ce.
e
an rs
i
o
c n
startup
a
ww l
V
mt10050_g NX 4
Customer Defaults
Set the Defaults Level to the level you want to examine, Site, Group,
or User.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Practical Applications of NX
D-9
Customer Defaults
When you receive the new software use Import Defaults to validate your
previous settings against the new release.
Importing Customer Defaults values file:
file.>
Total settings and locks imported:
10
i
o
c n
Total settings rejected due to values being locked at the higher level:
om
e
an rs
Total settings already set to the same value and lock status:
D-10
Practical Applications of NX
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
mt10050_g NX 4
Index
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Block . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boolean Operations .
Errors . . . . . . . . .
Boss . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom-Up Modeling
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . D-6
D-3, D-6
. . . . D-3
. . . . 4-7
10-15
11-4
10-2
11-7
11-2
10-10
10-21
om
.nu
ce.
. . . . . . . 1-3
.
.
.
.
e
an rs
. . . . . 18-47
. . . . . 18-67
...
...
..
...
i
o
c n
. . . . . . 9-11
. . . . . . 9-12
T
r
w i
. . . . . . 3-3
. . . . . 13-22
a
ww l
V
DPV . . . . . . .
Files . . . . . . .
Setting Levels
Cylinder . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4-3
. 14-9
14-11
. . 5-7
. 11-2
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Displayed Part .
Coordinate System . . . . .
Absolute . . . . . . . . . . .
WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSYS Constructor dialog
Cue line . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Defaults
Directory Structures . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C
8-10
. 1-9
. 3-2
. 3-3
. 3-3
. 3-4
. 1-4
. . . . . . . . . D-8
Practical Applications of NX
Index-1
Index
Drawings
adding a base view . . .
adding projected views
creating new sheets . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting views . . . . . . .
editing . . . . . . . . . . . .
editing views . . . . . . .
opening . . . . . . . . . . .
view preferences . . . . .
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18-21
18-24
18-3
18-7
18-27
18-5
18-26
18-4
18-17
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-21
. 9-9
5-48
16-2
16-4
16-3
14-10
. 9-3
. 9-7
10-4
10-7
10-5
10-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-37
5-38
5-37
15-2
13-57
. 1-16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-3
6-4
6-5
B-5
6-6
9-9
B-2
B-3
14-3
14-16
14-14
F
Feature Coordinate System . . . . . . . 5-3
Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
G
Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
H
Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Index-2
Practical Applications of NX
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 15-4
. 9-12
. 17-2
11-12
11-14
11-15
11-18
11-20
11-13
11-16
11-17
11-21
11-23
. 2-14
. 2-15
. 2-16
. 2-16
. 2-16
. 2-16
. 2-16
. 2-16
. 2-16
. 2-16
. 2-16
15-22
ce.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.nu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
T
r
w i
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
an rs
.
.
.
.
.
.
Layers . . . . . . . .
Moving Layers
Load Options . . .
Load Failure . .
Load Method .
Load States . .
om
. . . . . 8-3
a
ww l
V
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
with Rollback . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluate Sketch . . . . . . . . . .
Exit NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expressions
Dialog with less options . . .
Dialog with more options . .
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Referencers . . . . . . . . .
List References . . . . . . . . . .
operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
precedence and associativity
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
o
c n
mt10050_g NX 4
Index
Reattach a Feature . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Features . . . . . . . . . .
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Referencing Existing Parameters
Reposition Component . . . . . . . .
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 5-24
. . . . . . . . 5-28
. . . . . . . . . 6-6
15-23
. . 5-2
. 12-2
12-51
. 5-28
11-30
14-36
. . . . . . . . 1-9
. . . . . . . 1-14
. . . . . . . . 1-7
. . . . . . . 1-10
. . . . . . . 1-12
5-42, 9-8, 15-3
. . . . . . . . 5-2
. . . . . . . 5-23
. . . . . . . . 3-7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.nu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-39
5-40
5-40
. 5-3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-27
. 5-9
5-26
5-11
5-25
5-10
5-10
5-11
. 5-9
. . . . . . . 18-47
. . . . . . . 18-17
. . . . . . . . 2-21
Q
Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved
ce.
om
Selection
Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Intent
curve/edge rules . . . . . . . .
Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Follow Fillet . . . . . . . . . . .
selecting sketches . . . . . . .
Stop at Intersection . . . . .
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show/Remove Constraints . .
Sketch
Constraining . . . . . . . . . .
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert To/From Reference
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curve Creation . . . . . . . . .
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing . . . . . . . . . . .
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Direction . . . . .
Show/Remove Constraints
Text Height . . . . . . . . . . .
Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . .
e
an rs
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Entry Options
Formula . . . . . . . . . . .
Part
Change Displayed . . . .
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save As . . . . . . . . . . .
Part Navigator . . . . . . . .
Placement Face . . . . . . .
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point Constructor dialog
Positioning
Edit
Add Dimension . .
Delete Dimension .
Edit Dimension . . . . .
Form Features . . . . . .
Positioning Methods
Angular . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal . . . . . . . . .
Line onto Line . . . . . .
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel at a Distance .
Perpendicular . . . . . . .
Point onto Line . . . . . .
Point onto Point . . . . .
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences
Annotation . . . . . . . . .
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preview Selection . . . . . .
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . 2-21
. . . . . 2-21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14-22
. . 8-5
. . 7-4
14-23
. 14-4
14-23
. . 7-2
13-66
. . . . 13-48
. . . . 13-63
. . . . 13-92
13-8, 13-13
. . . . 13-21
. . . . 13-26
. . . . 13-27
. . . . 13-33
. . . . 13-24
. . . . 13-23
. . . . 13-48
. . . . 13-57
. . . . 13-51
. . . . 13-11
. . . . . 13-2
. . . . 13-10
. . . . 13-66
. . . . 13-50
. . . . 13-46
Practical Applications of NX
Index-3
Index
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 5-21
. 5-22
13-22
. . 3-6
. . 1-2
. . 1-4
. 10-2
14-10
14-27
. . . . . . . . . 18-33
. . . . . . . . . 18-36
T
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . 2-2
. . . . . 11-6
. . . . . . 2-3
2-19, 10-16
. . . . . . 3-6
. . . . . 11-2
Index-4
Practical Applications of NX
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . 15-8
13-57, 15-21
. . . . . 18-33
. . . . . 18-40
. . . . . 18-36
Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Preferences . . . . . .
Edges Hidden by Edges
Hidden Lines . . . . . . .
Smooth Edges . . . . . . .
Virtual Intersections . .
...
...
..
...
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4-8
18-17
18-18
18-18
18-19
18-20
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 3-3
. . 3-5
. . 3-5
10-19
WCS . . . . .
Dynamics
Move . . .
Work Part .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.nu
T
r
w i
Unite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
.
.
.
.
.
e
an rs
.
.
.
.
.
.
a
ww l
V
Toolbars . . . . . . . .
Assemblies . . . . .
Customizing . . . .
Selection . . . . . .
Snap Point . . . . .
Top-Down Modeling
Update Failures . . . . . .
Update Model . . . . . . .
Utility Symbols . . . . . .
cylindrical centerline
linear centerline . . . .
om
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
i
o
c n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ce.
Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
positioning . . . . . . .
Snap Angle . . . . . . . .
Snap Point toolbar . . .
Starting NX . . . . . . . .
Status Line . . . . . . . .
Subassembly . . . . . . .
Subtract . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep Along Guide . .
Symbols
utility symbols . . . .
linear centerline
mt10050_g NX 4
om
i
o
c n
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
L
E
A
R
N
I
N
G
A
D
V
A
N
T
A
G
E
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
STUDENT PROFILE
In order to stay in tune with our customers we ask for some background information. This information will be kept
confidential and will not be shared with anyone outside of Education Services.
Please Print
Your Name
U.S. citizen
Course Title/Dates
Yes
No
thru
Aero
Consumer products
Machining
a
ww l
V
Tooling
Medical
Other
ce.
Auto
e
an rs
Industry:
om
i
o
c n
Location
Employer
Please verify/add to this list of training for Unigraphics, I-deas, Imageware, Teamcenter Mfg., Teamcenter Eng. (I-Man), Teamcenter
Enterprise (Metaphase), or Dimensional Mgmt./Visualization. Medium means Instructor-lead (IL), On-line (OL), or Self-paced (SP)
When
Course Name
Medium
.nu
From Whom
T
r
w i
Software
None
Novice
Intermediate
Advanced
Thank you for your participation and we hope your training experience will be an outstanding one.
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Morning
Introduction & Overview
Lesson 1.
Getting Started
Lesson 2.
The NX User Interface
Afternoon
Lesson 3.
Lesson 4.
Lesson 5.
Lesson 6.
Morning
Lesson 7.
Shell
Lesson 8.
Edge Operations
Workbook Project Description & Section 1 Rear Differential Modeling
Lesson 9.
Model Construction Query
i
o
c n
Tuesday
Coordinate Systems
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Positional Form Features
Expressions
om
ce.
Morning
a
ww l
V
Wednesday
e
an rs
Afternoon
Lesson 10.
Introduction to Assemblies
Lesson 11.
Adding Components & Mating Conditions
Workbook Section 2
Rear Differential Assembly
Thursday
T
r
w i
Afternoon
Lesson 13.
Morning
.nu
Lesson 12.
Datum Features
Workbook Section 3
Rear Axle Modeling and Assembly
Workbook Section 4
Left Pinion Modeling and Assembly
Sketching
Lesson 14.
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Workbook Section 5
Power Pack Sketching
Workbook Section 6
Rear Drive Gear Modeling
Afternoon
Workbook Section 7
Part and Assembly Editing
Lesson 15.
Editing the Model
Lesson 16.
Instance Arrays
Workbook Section 8
Rear Drive Gear Completion
Friday
Morning
Workbook Section 9
Assembly Completion
Lesson 17.
The Master Model
Lesson 18.
Introduction to Drafting
Afternoon
Workbook Section 10
i
o
c n
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
Accelerators
The following Accelerators can be listed from within an NX session by choosing
InformationCustom MenubarAccelerators.
Accelerator
Ctrl+N
Ctrl+O
Ctrl+S
Ctrl+Shift+A
Ctrl+P
Ctrl+G
Ctrl+Shift+G
Ctrl+U
Ctrl+Z
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
Ctrl+V
Ctrl+D or Delete
F
G
B
E
C
Ctrl+A
Ctrl+B
Ctrl+Shift+B
Ctrl+Shift+K
Ctrl+Shift+U
Ctrl+T
Ctrl+J
Ctrl+Shift+Z
Ctrl+R
Ctrl+H
Ctrl+Shift+N
Ctrl+Shift+O
Ctrl+Shift+F
Ctrl+Shift+H
F4
F3
Ctrl+F8
S
X
R
T
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
Function
FileNew...
FileOpen...
FileSave
FileSave As...
FilePlot...
FileExecuteGrip...
FileExecuteDebug Grip...
FileExecuteNX Open...
EditUndo
EditCut
EditCopy
Edit-Paste
EditDelete...
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Feature
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Face
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Body
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Edge
EditSelectionTop Selection Priority - Component
EditSelection-Select All
EditBlankBlank...
EditBlankReverse Blank All
EditBlankUnblank Selected...
EditBlankUnblank All of Part
EditTransform...
EditObject Display...
ViewOperationZoom...
ViewOperationRotate...
ViewOperationSection...
ViewLayoutNew...
ViewLayoutOpen...
ViewLayoutFit All Views
ViewVisualizationHigh Quality Image...
ViewInformation Window
ViewCurrent Dialog
ViewReset Orientation
InsertSketch...
InsertDesign FeatureExtrude...
InsertDesign FeatureRevolve...
InsertTrimTrimmed Sheet...
V
Ctrl+L
Ctrl+Shift+V
W
Ctrl+E
Alt+F8
Alt+F11
Ctrl+Shift+R
Ctrl+Shift+P
Ctrl+Shift+S
Ctrl+I
Ctrl+Shift+C
Ctrl+Shift+J
Ctrl+Shift+T
M or Ctrl+M
Ctrl+Alt+S
Ctrl+Shift+D
Ctrl+Alt+M
Ctrl+Alt+N
A
Ctrl+W
F1
F5
Ctrl+F
F6
F7
Home
End
Ctrl+Alt+T
Ctrl+Alt+F
Ctrl+Alt+R
Ctrl+Alt+L
F8
om
ce.
.nu
T
r
w i
a
ww l
V
e
an rs
i
o
c n
InsertSweepVariational Sweep...
FormatLayer Settings...
FormatVisible in View...
FormatWCSDisplay
ToolsExpression...
ToolsJournalPlay...
ToolsJournalEdit
ToolsMacroStart Record...
ToolsMacroPlayback...
ToolsMacroStep...
InformationObject...
AnalysisCurveRefresh Curvature Graphs
PreferencesObject...
PreferencesSelection...
StartModeling...
StartAll ApplicationsShape Studio...
StartDrafting...
StartManufacturing...
StartNX Sheet Metal...
StartAssemblies
StartGateway...
HelpOn Context...
Refresh
Fit
Zoom
Rotate
Orient View-Trimetric
Orient View-Isometric
Orient View-Top
Orient View-Front
Orient View-Right
Orient View-Left
Snap View
Evaluation Delivery
NX 4 PAU, Course #MT10050
Dates
thru
ce.
a
ww l
V
STRONGLY
AGREE
om
i
o
c n
e
an rs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
AGREE
Instructor:
SOMEWHAT
AGREE
SOMEWHAT
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
Instructor:
STRONGLY
DISAGREE
Please share your opinion in all of the following sections with a check in the appropriate box:
Poor
Excellent
.nu
T
r
w i
Class Logistics:
1.
The training facilities were comfortable, clean, and provided a good learning
environment
2. The computer equipment was reliable
3. The software performed properly
4. The overhead projection unit was clear and working properly
5. The registration and confirmation process was efficient
Hotels: (We try to leverage this information to better accommodate our customers)
Best hotel Ive stayed at
1.
2.
3.
YES
NO
SEE BACK
Evaluation - Courseware
NX 4 PAU, Course #MT10050
6.
How appropriate was the length of the course relative to the material?
i
o
c n
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ce.
Poor
I met the prerequisites for the class (I had the skills I needed)
My objectives were consistent with the course objectives
I will be able to use the skills I have learned on my job
My expectations for this course were met
I am confident that with practice I will become proficient
Name (optional):
STRONGLY
AGREE
SOMEWHAT
AGREE
AGREE
Just right
om
Too long
.nu
a
ww l
V
Student:
T
r
w i
e
an rs
Too short
SOMEWHAT
DISAGREE
Material:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DISAGREE
Please share your opinion for all of the following sections with a check in the appropriate box
STRONGLY
DISAGREE
Location/room
Please check this box if you would like your comments featured in our training publications.
(Your name is required at the bottom of this form)
Please check this box if you would like to receive more information on our other courses and services.
(Your name is required at the bottom of this form)
Thank you for your business. We hope to continue to provide your training
and personal development for the future.
Excellent